WO2024017193A1 - Tci状态确定方法、装置、终端和网络侧设备 - Google Patents
Tci状态确定方法、装置、终端和网络侧设备 Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2024017193A1 WO2024017193A1 PCT/CN2023/107708 CN2023107708W WO2024017193A1 WO 2024017193 A1 WO2024017193 A1 WO 2024017193A1 CN 2023107708 W CN2023107708 W CN 2023107708W WO 2024017193 A1 WO2024017193 A1 WO 2024017193A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- target
- tci
- csi
- dci
- tci state
- Prior art date
Links
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 title claims abstract description 174
- 230000001960 triggered effect Effects 0.000 claims description 128
- 230000005540 biological transmission Effects 0.000 claims description 89
- 230000006399 behavior Effects 0.000 claims description 30
- 230000000737 periodic effect Effects 0.000 claims description 24
- 230000001427 coherent effect Effects 0.000 claims description 7
- 238000004891 communication Methods 0.000 abstract description 29
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 34
- 230000011664 signaling Effects 0.000 description 34
- 238000005516 engineering process Methods 0.000 description 14
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 11
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 10
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 8
- 238000013507 mapping Methods 0.000 description 8
- 238000004590 computer program Methods 0.000 description 6
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 description 5
- 230000001360 synchronised effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000002776 aggregation Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000004220 aggregation Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000012544 monitoring process Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000009286 beneficial effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 125000004122 cyclic group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 239000011159 matrix material Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000003068 static effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- LKKMLIBUAXYLOY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-Amino-1-methyl-5H-pyrido[4,3-b]indole Chemical compound N1C2=CC=CC=C2C2=C1C=C(N)N=C2C LKKMLIBUAXYLOY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 102100031413 L-dopachrome tautomerase Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 101710093778 L-dopachrome tautomerase Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000699670 Mus sp. Species 0.000 description 1
- 230000003213 activating effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000001174 ascending effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000003190 augmentative effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000001514 detection method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000007599 discharging Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000004973 liquid crystal related substance Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000007774 longterm Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000005259 measurement Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000007246 mechanism Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000011084 recovery Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000002441 reversible effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000004984 smart glass Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000005406 washing Methods 0.000 description 1
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W72/00—Local resource management
- H04W72/04—Wireless resource allocation
- H04W72/044—Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource
- H04W72/046—Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource the resource being in the space domain, e.g. beams
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
- H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
- H04L5/0048—Allocation of pilot signals, i.e. of signals known to the receiver
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W72/00—Local resource management
- H04W72/04—Wireless resource allocation
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W72/00—Local resource management
- H04W72/04—Wireless resource allocation
- H04W72/044—Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W72/00—Local resource management
- H04W72/12—Wireless traffic scheduling
- H04W72/1263—Mapping of traffic onto schedule, e.g. scheduled allocation or multiplexing of flows
- H04W72/1268—Mapping of traffic onto schedule, e.g. scheduled allocation or multiplexing of flows of uplink data flows
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W72/00—Local resource management
- H04W72/12—Wireless traffic scheduling
- H04W72/1263—Mapping of traffic onto schedule, e.g. scheduled allocation or multiplexing of flows
- H04W72/1273—Mapping of traffic onto schedule, e.g. scheduled allocation or multiplexing of flows of downlink data flows
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W72/00—Local resource management
- H04W72/20—Control channels or signalling for resource management
- H04W72/21—Control channels or signalling for resource management in the uplink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards the network
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W72/00—Local resource management
- H04W72/20—Control channels or signalling for resource management
- H04W72/23—Control channels or signalling for resource management in the downlink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards a terminal
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W72/00—Local resource management
- H04W72/20—Control channels or signalling for resource management
- H04W72/23—Control channels or signalling for resource management in the downlink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards a terminal
- H04W72/231—Control channels or signalling for resource management in the downlink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards a terminal the control data signalling from the layers above the physical layer, e.g. RRC or MAC-CE signalling
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W72/00—Local resource management
- H04W72/20—Control channels or signalling for resource management
- H04W72/23—Control channels or signalling for resource management in the downlink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards a terminal
- H04W72/232—Control channels or signalling for resource management in the downlink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards a terminal the control data signalling from the physical layer, e.g. DCI signalling
Definitions
- This application belongs to the field of communication technology, and specifically relates to a TCI status determination method, device, terminal and network side equipment.
- the network side device needs to use the beam indication scheme corresponding to the channel for each channel to indicate its Transmission Configuration Indicator (TCI) state.
- TCI Transmission Configuration Indicator
- the terminal uses the TCI status indicated by the network side device to determine which beam to use for transmission, so the beam indication process for each channel is relatively complicated.
- Embodiments of the present application provide a TCI status determination method, device, terminal and network side equipment, which can simplify the channel and/or signal beam indication process.
- a method for determining TCI status includes:
- the terminal obtains the common beam information indicated by the network side device, where the common beam information includes M first TCI states, and M is a positive integer;
- the terminal determines the target TCI state of the target channel and/or the target signal from the M first TCI states;
- the target channel includes: at least one of the physical uplink control channel PUCCH, physical downlink control channel PDCCH, physical downlink shared channel PDSCH and physical uplink shared channel PUSCH; or the target signal includes: sounding reference signal SRS and at least one of channel state information reference signals CSI-RS.
- a TCI status determination device applied to a terminal, and the device includes:
- the acquisition module is used to acquire the common beam information indicated by the network side device, wherein the common beam information includes M first TCI states, and M is a positive integer;
- a first determination module configured to determine the target TCI state of the target channel and/or the target signal from the M first TCI states
- the target channel includes: at least one of the physical uplink control channel PUCCH, physical downlink control channel PDCCH, physical downlink shared channel PDSCH and physical uplink shared channel PUSCH; or the target signal includes: sounding reference signal SRS and at least one of channel state information reference signals CSI-RS.
- a method for determining TCI status includes:
- the network side device indicates common beam information to the terminal, where the common beam information includes M first TCI states, M is a positive integer;
- the network side device determines the target TCI state of the target channel and/or the target signal from the M first TCI states
- the target channel includes: at least one of the physical uplink control channel PUCCH, physical downlink control channel PDCCH, physical downlink shared channel PDSCH and physical uplink shared channel PUSCH; or the target signal includes: sounding reference signal SRS and at least one of channel state information reference signals CSI-RS.
- a TCI status determination device which is applied to network side equipment.
- the device includes:
- a first sending module configured to indicate common beam information to the terminal, where the common beam information includes M first TCI states, where M is a positive integer;
- a second determination module configured to determine the target TCI state of the target channel and/or the target signal from the M first TCI states
- the target channel includes: at least one of the physical uplink control channel PUCCH, the physical downlink control channel PDCCH, the physical downlink shared channel PDSCH and the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH; or the target signal includes: the sounding reference signal SRS and at least one of channel state information reference signals CSI-RS.
- a terminal in a fifth aspect, includes a processor and a memory, and the memory Programs or instructions executable on the processor are stored, and when executed by the processor, the steps of the method as described in the first aspect are implemented.
- a terminal including a processor and a communication interface, wherein the communication interface is used to obtain common beam information indicated by a network side device, wherein the common beam information includes M first TCI states, M is a positive integer; the processor is configured to determine the target channel and/or the target TCI state of the target signal from the M first TCI states; wherein the target channel includes: physical uplink control channel PUCCH, physical downlink At least one of the control channel PDCCH, the physical downlink shared channel PDSCH and the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH; or, the target signal includes: at least one of the sounding reference signal SRS and the channel state information reference signal CSI-RS.
- the target channel includes: physical uplink control channel PUCCH, physical downlink At least one of the control channel PDCCH, the physical downlink shared channel PDSCH and the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH; or, the target signal includes: at least one of the sounding reference signal SRS and the channel state information reference signal CSI-RS.
- a network side device in a seventh aspect, includes a processor and a memory.
- the memory stores programs or instructions that can be run on the processor.
- the program or instructions are executed by the processor.
- a network side device including a processor and a communication interface, wherein the communication interface is used to indicate common beam information to a terminal, wherein the common beam information includes M first TCI states, M is a positive integer; the processor is configured to determine the target channel and/or the target TCI state of the target signal from the M first TCI states; wherein the target channel includes: physical uplink control channel PUCCH, physical downlink control channel PDCCH, physical downlink shared channel PDSCH and physical uplink shared channel PUSCH; or, the target signal includes: at least one of sounding reference signal SRS and channel state information reference signal CSI-RS.
- a ninth aspect provides a wireless communication system, including: a terminal and a network side device.
- the terminal can be used to perform the steps of the TCI status determination method as described in the first aspect.
- the network side device can be used to perform the steps of the TCI status determination method as described in the first aspect. The steps of the TCI status determination method described in the three aspects.
- a readable storage medium is provided. Programs or instructions are stored on the readable storage medium. When the programs or instructions are executed by a processor, the steps of the method described in the first aspect are implemented, or the steps of the method are implemented as described in the first aspect. The steps of the method described in the third aspect.
- a chip in an eleventh aspect, includes a processor and a communication interface.
- the communication interface is coupled to the processor.
- the processor is used to run programs or instructions to implement the method described in the first aspect. method, or implement a method as described in the third aspect.
- a computer program/program product is provided, the computer program/program product is stored in a storage medium, and the computer program/program product is executed by at least one processor to implement as described in the first aspect
- the terminal obtains the common beam information indicated by the network side device, wherein the common beam information includes M first TCI states, M is a positive integer; the terminal obtains the M first TCI states from the Determine the target channel and/or the target TCI state of the target signal; wherein, the target channel includes: at least one of the physical uplink control channel PUCCH, the physical downlink control channel PDCCH, the physical downlink shared channel PDSCH and the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH. item; or, the target signal includes: at least one of a sounding reference signal SRS and a channel state information reference signal CSI-RS.
- the target channel includes: at least one of the physical uplink control channel PUCCH, the physical downlink control channel PDCCH, the physical downlink shared channel PDSCH and the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH. item; or, the target signal includes: at least one of a sounding reference signal SRS and a channel state information reference signal CSI-RS.
- PUCCH, PDCCH, PDSCH, PUSCH, SRS and CSI-RS can share the M first TCI states indicated by the network side equipment.
- the complexity of beam indication is reduced. degree.
- Figure 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a wireless communication system to which embodiments of the present application can be applied;
- FIG. 2 is a flow chart of a TCI status determination method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 3 is a flow chart of another TCI status determination method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 4 is a schematic structural diagram of a TCI status determination device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 5 is a schematic structural diagram of another TCI state determination device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- Figure 6 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- Figure 7 is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of a terminal provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- Figure 8 is a schematic structural diagram of a network side device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- first, second, etc. in the description and claims of this application are used to distinguish similar objects and are not used to describe a specific order or sequence. It is to be understood that the terms so used are interchangeable under appropriate circumstances so that the embodiments of the present application can be practiced in sequences other than those illustrated or described herein, and that "first" and “second” are distinguished objects It is usually one type, and the number of objects is not limited.
- the first object can be one or multiple.
- “and/or” in the description and claims indicates at least one of the connected objects, and the character “/" generally indicates that the related objects are in an "or” relationship.
- LTE Long Term Evolution
- LTE-Advanced, LTE-A Long Term Evolution
- LTE-A Long Term Evolution
- CDMA Code Division Multiple Access
- TDMA Time Division Multiple Access
- FDMA Frequency Division Multiple Access
- OFDMA Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access
- SC-FDMA Single-carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access
- NR New Radio
- FIG. 1 shows a block diagram of a wireless communication system to which embodiments of the present application are applicable.
- the wireless communication system includes a terminal 11 and a network side device 12.
- the terminal 11 may be a mobile phone, a tablet computer (Tablet Personal Computer), a laptop computer (Laptop Computer), or a notebook computer, a personal digital assistant (Personal Digital Assistant, PDA), a palmtop computer, a netbook, or a super mobile personal computer.
- Tablet Personal Computer Tablet Personal Computer
- laptop computer laptop computer
- PDA Personal Digital Assistant
- PDA Personal Digital Assistant
- wearable devices include: smart watches, smart bracelets, smart headphones, smart glasses, smart jewelry (smart bracelets, smart bracelets, smart rings, smart necklaces, smart anklets, smart anklets, etc.), smart wristbands, Smart clothing, etc.
- the network side device 12 may include an access network device or a core network device, where the access network device may also be called a radio access network device, a radio access network (Radio Access Network, RAN), a radio access network function or a wireless access network unit.
- the access network device 12 may include a base station, a Wireless Local Area Network (Wireless Local Area Network, WLAN) access point or a Wireless Fidelity (Wireless Fidelity, WiFi) node, etc.
- the base station may be called a Node B, an Evolved Node B (Evolved Node B).
- eNB access point
- BTS Base Transceiver Station
- BSS Basic Service Set
- ESS Extended Service Set
- home B node home evolved B node
- TRP Transmitting Receiving Point
- the base station is not limited to specific technical terms, and needs to be explained
- only the base station in the NR system is used as an example for introduction, and the specific type of the base station is not limited.
- the network side equipment can perform beam instructions on the downlink and uplink channels or reference signals for network side equipment and user equipment (User Equipment, UE) (such as terminals) ), establish beam links between them to realize the transmission of channels or reference signals.
- UE User Equipment
- Beam identification information spatial relation information, spatial domain transmission filter information, spatial domain reception filter information, spatial filter information, transmission configuration indication status (TCI status) information, Quasi-colocation (QCL) information, QCL parameters.
- the downlink beam information can usually be represented by TCI status information or QCL information.
- Uplink beam information can usually be represented using TCI status information or spatial relation information.
- each channel or reference signal has its own beam indication mechanism:
- Radio Resource Control configures K TCI states for each control resource set (Control resource set, CORESET).
- K Control resource set, CORESET
- MAC Media Access Control
- CE Control Element, CE
- the UE monitors the PDCCH it uses the same QCL, that is, the same TCI state, for all search spaces (SS) in the CORESET to monitor the PDCCH.
- the reference signal (reference signal) in the TCI state such as: periodic channel state information reference signal (Channel State Information Reference Signal, CSI-RS) resource (resource), semi-persistent CSI-RS resource, synchronization signal block (Synchronization Signal Block) , SSB), etc.) and the UE-specific (UE-specific) PDCCH Demodulation Reference Signal (DMRS) port is spatial QCL.
- CSI-RS Channel State Information Reference Signal
- CSI-RS Channel State Information Reference Signal
- CSI-RS Channel State Information Reference Signal
- the network side device configures M TCI states through RRC signaling, and then uses MAC CE signaling to activate TCI corresponding to up to 8 code points (codepoints) status, and then notify the TCI status through the 3-bit TCI field (field) of the Downlink Control Information (DCI).
- codepoints code points
- DCI Downlink Control Information
- the referenceSignal in the TCI status and the DMRS port of the PDSCH to be scheduled are QCL.
- the UE can learn which receiving beam is used to receive the PDSCH according to the TCI status.
- the network side device configures QCL information for the CSI-RS resource through RRC signaling.
- the network side device indicates its QCL information when activating a CSI-RS resource from the CSI-RS resource set configured in RRC through MAC CE signaling.
- the network side device configures QCL for the CSI-RS resource through RRC signaling and uses DCI to trigger CSI-RS.
- the network side device uses RRC signaling to configure spatial relationship information (spatial) for each PUCCH resource through the parameter "PUCCH spatial relationship information (PUCCH-SpatialRelationInfo)" relation information), when the spatial relation information configured for the PUCCH resource contains multiple spatial relation information, use MAC CE to indicate or activate one of the spatial relation information.
- PUCCH-SpatialRelationInfo Physical Uplink Control Channel
- the spatial relation information of PUSCH is the sounding reference signal (Sounding Reference Signal, SRS) resource indication in the DCI when the DCI carried by the PDCCH schedules the PUSCH (
- SRS Sounding Reference Signal
- Each SRI codepoint of the SRS resource indicator (SRI) field indicates an SRI, which is used to indicate the spatial relation information of PUSCH.
- unified TCI Framework unified TCI Framework
- Beam the same beam indicated by the network side device using MAC CE and/or DCI can be used for the transmission of multiple channels.
- This beam can also be called a common beam (common beam).
- the beam indication process of the unified TCI framework is as follows:
- the network side device configures a TCI state pool through RRC signaling, and uses MAC CE signaling to activate one or more TCI states in the TCI state pool.
- MAC CE activates the TCI state corresponding to 1 codepoint
- the activated TCI state is directly applied to the target signal.
- the network side device uses the TCI field in the DCI to indicate a codepoint, and the TCI status corresponding to the codepoint is applied to the target signal.
- the TCI state in the unified TCI framework can include two modes: joint TCI state and independent TCI state. This mode is configured by RRC signaling of the network side device.
- each codepoint corresponds to 1 TCI status;
- each codepoint can correspond to a downlink (Down Link, DL) TCI state and an uplink (Up Link, UL) TCI state, or 1 DL TCI state, or 1 UL TCI status.
- aperiodic CSI for CSI -RS resources Aperiodic CSI-RS resources for CSI
- aperiodic CSI-RS resources for BM Beam Management, BM
- BM Beam Management
- DCI formats 1_1/1_2 with DL allocation and DCI format 1_1/1_2 without DL allocation are supported.
- Beam indication The effective time (beam application time) of the TCI state indicated by DCI is defined as: the first time slot in which the indicated TCI state is applied is at least the last of the acknowledgment information of the joint or independent DL/UL beam indication The first slot to apply the indicated TCI is at least Y symbols after the last symbol of the first slot after the acknowledgment of the joint or separate DL/UL beam indication).
- the path loss (pathloss RS, PLRS) in the power control parameters is configured in the TCI state by the network side device or is associated with the TCI state.
- P0, alpha, close loop index and other parameter configurations are related to the TCI status by the network side device configuration.
- PUCCH, PUSCH, and SRS there will be respective parameter configurations (settings) associated with the TCI status, or included in the configuration information of each channel.
- the network For a Carrier Aggregation (CA) scenario, the network indicates common QCL information (common QCL information) and/or a common UL TX spatial filter (common UL TX spatial filter(s) across a set of configured CC).
- common QCL information common QCL information
- common UL TX spatial filter common UL TX spatial filter(s) across a set of configured CC
- the unified TCI framework was proposed in 3GPP R17 above, it is only applicable to single-TRP (single-TRP, sTRP) scenarios, and for multi-TRP (multi-TRP, mTRP) transmission introduced in 3GPP R16 does not apply.
- the unified TCI status indicated by the network side device The number of (state) (that is, the TCI state corresponding to the public beam in the unified TCI framework, and the unified TCI state is also called the public TCI state in the embodiment of this application) can reach 4.
- the relevant technology does not propose how to obtain the information from the network side device.
- the embodiment of this application proposes how to determine each channel from the unified TCI state (i.e. the first TCI state) indicated by the network side device when applying the unified TCI framework to the channel and/or reference signal in the mTRP scenario. Or the scheme of beam information of reference signal.
- TCI status determination method TCI status determination device, terminal and network side device provided by the embodiments of the present application will be described in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings through some embodiments and application scenarios.
- the embodiment of the present application provides a method for determining TCI status.
- the execution subject may be a terminal.
- the terminal may be various terminals 11 listed in Figure 1 or other types of terminals, which are not specifically limited here.
- the TCI status determination method may include the following steps:
- Step 201 The terminal obtains the common beam information indicated by the network side device, where the common beam information includes M first TCI states, where M is a positive integer.
- the above-mentioned first TCI state can be understood as an activated or indicated TCI state that can be shared by each channel and reference signal in the mTRP scenario.
- the network side device configures the TCI state pool through RRC signaling and uses MAC CE signaling. Let the TCI state corresponding to one or at least two codepoints be activated. When the number of codepoints corresponding to the activated TCI state is greater than 1, the network side device then uses the TCI field in the DCI to indicate at least part of the activated TCI state as the first TCI state. .
- the multi-TRP scenario can be understood as one network side device may have at least two TRPs, and different TRPs may include the same and/or different beams.
- the network side device may communicate with the terminal via one or more of the at least two TRPs.
- Multi-TRP transmission can be divided into two situations: single DCI scheduling (sDCI) and multiple DCI (mDCI) scheduling based on control signaling:
- Multi-DCI (multi-DCI, mDCI) scheduling Each TRP sends its own PDCCH, and each PDCCH schedules its own PDSCH. At this time, multiple CORESETs configured for the UE are associated with different RRC parameter control resource set pool indexes ( CORESETPoolIndex) to use CORESETPoolIndex to correspond to different TRPs. At this time, the PDSCHs scheduled by the two TRPs can completely overlap, partially overlap, or not overlap, and the PUSCHs scheduled by the two TRPs cannot overlap.
- CORESETPoolIndex RRC parameter control resource set pool indexes
- Single DCI (single DCI, sDCI) scheduling A TRP sends a PDCCH to schedule a PDSCH. At this time, multiple CORESET configured for the UE cannot be associated with different CORESETPoolIndex. In this case, MAC CE activates up to 8 code points, of which at least one code point corresponds to two TCI states. When the codepoint indicated by the TCI field in a DCI corresponds to two TCI states and indicates that one TCI state contains "QCL-TypeD", it means that the PDSCH is scheduled from two TRPs.
- the PDSCH includes multiple transmission schemes, such as: different PDSCH
- the data of the layer corresponds to two TCI states (Scheme 1a, Space Division Multiplexing (SDM)); or the data on different frequency domain subcarriers corresponds to two TCI states (Scheme 2a/2b, Frequency Division Multiplexing (SDM)) Frequency Division Multiplex (FDM)); or each time domain repetition comes from a different TRP (Scheme 3/4, Time Division Multiplexing (TDM)).
- SDM Space Division Multiplexing
- FDM Frequency Division Multiplex
- TDM Time Division Multiplexing
- 3GPP R17 in the related technology supports the PDCCH repetition (repetition) transmission scheme in the mTRP scenario, and this scheme can only be applied in sDCI scheduling.
- the two search space sets (SS sets) where the PDCCH is located are explicitly configured to be related to each other through RRC signaling.
- the two SS sets are not limited to being associated with the same or different CORESET.
- the UE does not expect the third monitored SS set to be associated with any of the above two interrelated SS sets.
- Two interrelated SS sets have the same period, starting position (offset), duration (duration), number of monitoring occasions, aggregation level (Aggregation Level, AL), etc.
- the nth monitoring occasion of one SS set is associated with the nth monitoring occasion of another SS set, and the two candidate PDCCHs have the same candidate index (candidate index). Inter-slot PDCCH repetition is not supported.
- the above SS set can only be the terminal-specific search space (UE-specific Search Space, USS) and Type3 common search space (Common Search Space, CSS).
- the SS set configured by the RRC parameter recovery search space Id (recoverySearchSpaceId) is not associated with other SS sets.
- 3GPP R17 supports a DCI dynamically scheduled TDM PUSCH repetition transmission scheme in the mTRP scenario.
- each PUSCH repetition is sent using multiple transmit beams (spatial relations) corresponding to different TRPs to improve the reliability of PUSCH transmission.
- Type A (slot-level) PUSCH repetition one PUSCH repetition refers to one PUSCH transmission opportunity in each time slot; for Type B PUSCH repetition, one PUSCH repetition is a nominal repetition.
- DCI can indicate two sets of beams (spatial relation), precoding matrix (Transmitted Precoding Matrix Indicator, TPMI), power control parameters, etc., and a 2-bit new indication field is added to DCI to support single TRP (single TRP, sTRP ) and mTRP, and flexibly exchange the order of PUSCH repeated transmission beams.
- the mapping relationship between each PUSCH repetition and the beam can be configured by RRC parameters as cyclic mapping and sequential mapping.
- 3GPP R17 supports the PUCCH repetition transmission scheme in multiple TRP scenarios.
- the network activates the spatial relationship between the two beams for PUCCH resources or PUCCH group, then the PUCCH will be transmitted using two beams each time.
- mapping relationship between each PUCCH repetition and the beam can be configured by RRC parameters as mapping in turn. (cyclic mapping) and continuous mapping (sequential mapping).
- 3GPP R17 in related technologies supports the PDCCH Single Frequency Network (SFN) transmission scheme and the PDSCH SFN transmission scheme.
- SFN Single Frequency Network
- RRC signaling configures the SFN transmission scheme of PDCCH or PDSCH.
- PDCCH can only be monitored on USS or Type3CSS.
- the MAC CE command can activate 2 TCI states for PDCCH to use 2 beams for SFN transmission.
- the SFN transmission scheme includes scheme 1 (UE advanced receiver) and pre-compensation.
- SFN PDCCH (scheme 1) can schedule sTRP PDSCH (UE capability (capability))
- SFN PDCCH (scheme 1, pre-compensation) can schedule SFN PDSCH (scheme 1 or pre-compensation, the two modes are scheduled in one-to-one correspondence)
- sTRP PDCCH (only associated with USS or type3CSS (only associated with UE-specific Search Space (USS) or type3Common Search Space (type3CSS))
- USS UE-specific Search Space
- type3CSS type3Common Search Space
- sTRP PDCCH associated with CSS or CSS+USS can schedule sTRP PDSCH.
- SFN PDCCH cannot schedule the PDSCH transmission scheme in 3GPP R16.
- the unified TCI framework can be applied to the TCI determination scheme of PDCCH, PDSCH, PUSCH, SRS and CSI-RS in the above mTPR scenario.
- the M first TCI states include at least one of the following: M1 joint TCI states, M2 separate DL TCI states, and M3 separate UL TCI states, where M1, M2, and M3 are respectively greater than or equal to 0. An integer, and at least one of M1, M2, and M3 is greater than 0.
- M can usually be equal to 2.
- the number of the first TCI states is not specifically limited here.
- Step 202 The terminal determines the target channel and/or the target TCI state of the target signal from the M first TCI states; wherein the target channel includes: physical uplink control channel PUCCH, physical downlink control channel PDCCH, Physical downlink shared channel PDSCH and physical uplink shared channel At least one of PUSCH; the target signal includes: at least one of sounding reference signal SRS and channel state information reference signal CSI-RS.
- the target channel includes: physical uplink control channel PUCCH, physical downlink control channel PDCCH, Physical downlink shared channel PDSCH and physical uplink shared channel At least one of PUSCH; the target signal includes: at least one of sounding reference signal SRS and channel state information reference signal CSI-RS.
- the terminal can determine the target TCI state used by each target channel and/or target signal according to instructions from the network side device, pre-agreed rules in the protocol, etc.
- the unified TCI state can be applied.
- the above-mentioned method of determining the target TCI status used by each target channel and/or target signal according to instructions from the network side device may be that the network side device indicates the identification of the TCI status used by each channel or signal, Or the network side device may indicate the correspondence between the first identifier of each channel or signal and the TCI status, etc., so that the TCI status used by each channel or signal can be determined according to the instructions of the network side device.
- the above-mentioned method of determining the target TCI status used by each target channel and/or target signal is based on a pre-agreed rule in the protocol.
- the relevant information of each channel or signal can be agreed in the protocol (such as: The corresponding relationship between the channel or signal type, the number of required TCI states, corresponding identifiers, etc.) and the TCI state, the conditions for each channel or signal to adopt a certain TCI state, the selection range of the TCI state of each channel or signal, etc., thus The TCI status used by each channel or signal can be determined based on pre-agreed rules in the negotiation.
- the terminal determines the target TCI state of the target channel and/or the target signal from the M first TCI states, including:
- the terminal determines the target TCI state of the target channel and/or the target signal from the M first TCI states according to target information, wherein the target information includes at least one of the following:
- the quantitative relationship between the number of TCIs applicable to the target channel and/or the target signal and the number of TCI states required by the target channel and/or the target signal may be determined based on the number of first TCI states, thereby taking the The strategy that matches the quantitative relationship between the two is used to determine the target TCI state of each target channel and/or target signal. For example: if the number of the first TCI state is greater than or equal to the number of TCI states required by the target channel and/or target signal, Then all TCI states of the target channel and/or the target signal can be updated according to the M first TCI states.
- first TCI states If the number of first TCI states is less than the number of TCI states required by the target channel and/or the target signal, then it can be updated according to The M first TCI states are used to update the target channel and/or target Part of the TCI status of the target signal, or adjust the target channel and/or the transmission mode of the target signal;
- the first TCI state corresponding to each target channel and/or the target signal may be determined according to the corresponding relationship between the first TCI state and the first identification information, so that the target channel and/or the target signal Use its corresponding first TCI state.
- the corresponding relationship between the first TCI state and the first identification information includes at least one of the following:
- each target channel and/or signal may be determined according to the corresponding relationship between the arrangement positions of the M first TCI states indicated by the network side or agreed upon by the protocol and the arrangement positions of the first identification information.
- the arrangement position of the first identification information is used to determine the corresponding first TCI state;
- the target channel corresponding to each first identification information and/or the TCI state used by the signal is indicated according to the corresponding relationship between the first TCI state indicated by the network side and the first identification information.
- the number of first TCI states required by the target channel and/or the target signal can be determined based on the number of first identification information corresponding to the target channel and/or the target signal, for example: each SRS resource set (SRS resource The SRS resource in the set uses the same first TCI state corresponding to the SRS resource set;
- the value of the first identification information corresponding to the target channel and/or target signal may be determined according to the value of the first identification information corresponding to the target channel and/or the target signal as the TCI state used by the target channel and/or the target signal. ;
- the arrangement order or position of the M first TCI states may be used as the first TCI state and the target channel and/or target signal.
- the basis for the correspondence between them for example: the first TCI state ranked first corresponds to the target channel and/or target signal of the first identification information with the smallest value, the first TCI state ranked second and Corresponding to the target channel and/or target signal of the smallest piece of first identification information whose value is greater than the smallest first identification information;
- the arrangement order of the first identification information corresponding to the target channel and/or target signal can be used as the basis for the corresponding relationship between the first TCI state and the target channel and/or the target signal.
- the first TCI state arranged first and the first TCI state arranged first corresponds to the target channel and/or the target signal
- the first TCI state arranged in the second position corresponds to the target channel and/or target signal of the first identification information arranged in the second position
- the type of target channel and/or target signal may be different, and the TCI states used by them can be determined from the M first TCI states according to different corresponding rules;
- the target channel and/or the transmission mode of the target signal may include: repetition transmission mode, multi-beam simultaneous transmission (for example: Single Frequency Network (SFN) transmission, frequency division multiplexing (Frequency Division Multiplex, FDM) ), Space Division Multiplex (SDM) and other transmission modes, preset transmission mode (i.e. single beam transmission mode without repetition) or the preset transmission mode, the repeated transmission mode and the multi-beam simultaneous
- the transmission mode is a transmission mode that is dynamically switched. It should be noted that in the following embodiments, for the convenience of explanation, the mode of simultaneous multi-beam transmission is collectively called the SFN transmission mode, which does not constitute a specific limitation here.
- different The target channel of the transmission mode and/or the number of TCI states used by the target signal may be different, and the TCI state under the corresponding model can be determined from the M first TCI states according to different corresponding rules;
- the time domain behavior of the target channel and/or target signal may include periodic, semi-persistent, aperiodic, target channels and/or target signals with different time domain behaviors, and their triggering or scheduling or configuration processes may be different. In this case, the target channels and/or target signals may be triggered, scheduled, or configured differently.
- the time domain behavior of the signal matches the rules to determine the TCI state under the corresponding model. For example: for aperiodic signals, the indication domain in the DCI that triggers the aperiodic signal can be reused to indicate the TCI state used;
- the first information represents the first downlink control information DCI modulation If PUSCH or PDSCH is scheduled, the second information indicates that PUSCH or PDSCH is not scheduled by the first DCI, and the first DCI is used to trigger the target signal or schedule the target channel.
- the first DCI that triggers the target signal or schedules the target channel also schedules PUSCH or PDSCH, the TCI status of the target signal or target channel can be determined, and the respective TCI status of PUSCH or PDSCH can be Same or different or corresponding to each other;
- the target indication field of the first DCI is used to indicate at least one of the M first TCI states.
- the first TCI state used by at least one of the target signal or the target channel and the PUSCH or the PDSCH may be indicated through the target indication field of the first DCI.
- the target indication field in the first DCI is distinguished as The first field, the second field and the third field, where the first field is used to indicate the TCI status of the triggered SRS resource; the second field is used to indicate the TCI status of the triggered CSI-RS resource; the third field is used to indicate TCI status of scheduled PDSCH or PUSCH.
- N preset TCI states the common beam information includes the N preset TCI states, and N is a positive integer less than or equal to M.
- the TCI status determination method further includes:
- the terminal determines the N preset TCI states from the M first TCI states according to third information, wherein the third information is indicated by the network side device or agreed by the protocol;
- the terminal determines the target TCI state of the target channel and/or the target signal from the M first TCI states according to the target information, including:
- the terminal determines the target TCI state of the target channel and/or the target signal from the N preset TCI states according to the target information.
- the N preset TCI states may be N TCI states selected from the M first TCI states as indicated by the network side device or agreed in the protocol. In this way, the target channel and/or target channel are subsequently determined. When selecting the target TCI of a signal, you can select from the N preset TCI states, thus narrowing the selection range of TCI states.
- the correspondence between the N preset TCI states and the first identification information is similar to the corresponding relationship between the M first TCI states and the first identification information, and will not be described again here.
- the number, type, etc. of TCI states required by the target channel and/or target signal will also change. In this way, there will be a network
- the number of first TCI states indicated by the side device is greater than, less than, or equal to the number of TCI states required by the target channel and/or the target signal.
- the above-mentioned first identification information includes at least one of the following:
- one SRS resource set may include at least one SRS resource.
- the target signal includes the SRS of all SRS resources in the SRS resource set identified by the SRS resource set identification information;
- the target signal includes the SRS of the SRS resource identified by the SRS resource identification information.
- the above-mentioned first identification information includes at least one of the following:
- a CSI-RS resource set may include at least one CSI-RS resource group, and each The CSI-RS resource group may include at least one CSI-RS resource (CSI-RS resource).
- the target signal includes all CSI-RS resource groups in the CSI-RS resource set identified by the CSI-RS resource set identification information. CSI-RS on all CSI-RS resources;
- the target signal includes CSI-RS on all CSI-RS resources in the CSI-RS resource group identified by the CSI-RS resource group identification information;
- the target signal includes CSI-RS on the CSI-RS resource identified by the CSI-RS resource identification information.
- the above-mentioned first identification information includes at least one of the following:
- Control resource set CORESET group identification information where a CORESET group can include at least one CORESET.
- the target channel can include PDCCH on all CORESETs in the CORESET group identified by the CORESET group identification information;
- the target channel may include the PDCCH on CORESET identified by the CORESET identification information;
- the target channel may include PDCCH on the search space set identified by the search space set identification information.
- the above-mentioned first identification information includes at least one of the following:
- DMRS Demodulation Reference Signal
- the frequency domain resource identification information of the target channel
- the layer identification information of the target channel is the layer identification information of the target channel.
- the DMRS group (group), DMRS port (port), frequency domain resource, and layer (layer) of PDSCH or PUSCH can be identified, so that , which can indicate the TCI status used by each DMRS group, DMRS port, frequency domain resource or layer of PDSCH or PUSCH.
- the above-mentioned first identification information includes identification information of PUCCH resources or PUCCH resource groups, such as: PUCCH resource ID or PUCCH resource group ID, which is not exhaustive here.
- the target channel or target signal can be identified through the above-mentioned first identification information, so that the TCI state used by the target channel or target signal corresponding to each identification can be determined based on the corresponding relationship between the identification and the TCI state. .
- Scenario 1 Determine the target TCI state of the SRS based on the indicated unified TCI state.
- the network side device can be configured with one or more SRS resource sets.
- the usage of the SRS resource set can be configured by the network as codebook, non-codebook, antenna switching, Beam management (beam management), etc.
- the network side device can be configured to enable or disable the SRS resource set to use the unified TCI state.
- the parameters can be unified in the configuration information of the SRS resource set.
- the value of TCI state (followUnifiedTCIstate) is set to enabled (enabled) to enable the SRS resource set to use unified TCI state.
- the SRS may be periodic SRS or aperiodic SRS or semi-continuous SRS. Two methods are provided below to determine the target TCI status of SRS:
- Method 1 For aperiodic SRS, use a different method from SRS with other time domain behaviors to determine the target TCI state:
- the target TCI state of the aperiodic SRS can be determined according to at least one of the following:
- the target indication field indicates the TCI status of the PUSCH scheduled by the first DCI
- the M first TCI statuses include The TCI status of the PUSCH scheduled by the first DCI
- the terminal determines the target TCI state of the target channel and/or the target signal from the M first TCI states according to the target information, including:
- the terminal determines that the target TCI state of the target signal includes the TCI state indicated by the target indication field, and the target signal includes at least one of the following:
- the SRS resource set that the terminal needs to send is based on the correspondence between the SRS resource set identification information triggered by the first DCI and the first TCI state, and The TCI status indicated by the target indication field is determined;
- the SRS resources that the terminal needs to send are based on the corresponding relationship between the SRS resource identification information triggered by the first DCI and the first TCI state, and the The TCI status indicated by the target indication field of the first DCI is determined;
- the corresponding relationship between the SRS resource set identification information and the first TCI state may be the corresponding relationship between the SRS resource set identification information and the M first TCI states, or the corresponding relationship between the SRS resource set identification information and the M first TCI states.
- the corresponding relationship between the N preset TCI states is not specifically limited here.
- the TCI status indicated by the target indication field in the first DCI can be used preferentially for the scheduled PUSCH, and the TCI status triggered by the first DCI All or part of the SRS may use the TCI status.
- the terminal can determine that the target signal includes the entire SRS resource set triggered by the first DCI or the TCI state in the SRS resource. SRS, and determine the corresponding relationship between each SRS and the TCI state indicated by the first field, thereby determining the TCI state used by each SRS.
- the network side device instructs PUSCH through the first field to use 1 TCI state among M1 jointTCI states and M3 separate UL TCI states. If the first DCI indication triggers an SRS resource set, then the SRS in the SRS resource set The resource also uses the TCI state indicated by the first field.
- the terminal determines the SRS resource set identification information triggered by the first DCI and the first TCI state.
- the corresponding relationship between them, and the TCI status indicated by the target indication field determines the SRS resource set that needs to be sent, and the first TCI status corresponding to each SRS resource set. That is to say, the terminal only needs to send the SRS in the SRS resource set corresponding to the TCI state indicated by the first field. For SRS triggered by DCI and not corresponding to the SRS resource set corresponding to the TCI state indicated by the first field, it can Do not send.
- the network side device instructs PUSCH to use 1 TCI state among the M1/M3 TCI states through the first field, and the network side device is pre-configured or the protocol pre-agrees the correspondence between the SRS resource set and the M1/M3 TCI states. relationship, then only the SRS in the triggered SRS resource set corresponding to the TCI state indicated by the first field will be sent.
- the network side device instructs PUSCH to use K > 1 TCI state among M1/M3 TCI states through the first field, and the first DCI triggers K SRS resource sets, then the K TCI states indicated by the first field They are respectively used as the TCI state of the SRS resource in the K SRS resource set, where the K SRS resource set corresponds to the K TCI state one-to-one.
- the terminal when the target signal includes SRS in the SRS resources that the terminal needs to send, the terminal triggers the SRS resource identification information according to the first DCI.
- the corresponding relationship between the information and the first TCI status, and the TCI status indicated by the target indication field determines the SRS resources that need to be sent, and the first TCI status corresponding to each SRS resource. That is to say, the terminal only needs to send the SRS in the SRS resource corresponding to the TCI state indicated by the first field. For SRS triggered by DCI and not corresponding to the TCI state indicated by the first field, the SRS can be Do not send.
- the network side device instructs PUSCH to use L (L ⁇ 1) TCI states among M1/M3 TCI states through the first field, and the first DCI triggers 1 SRS resource set, and the SRS resource set contains L SRS resource, then the L TCI states indicated by the first field are used as the TCI states of the L SRS resources in the triggered SRS resource set.
- the target indication field indicates the TCI status of the PDSCH scheduled by the first DCI
- the M first TCI statuses include A TCI state corresponding to the same code point as the third TCI state and the third TCI state, where the third TCI state includes the TCI state of the PDSCH scheduled by the first DCI;
- the terminal determines the target TCI state of the target channel and/or the target signal from the M first TCI states according to the target information, including:
- the terminal determines that the target TCI state of the target signal includes a TCI state corresponding to the same code point as the third TCI state or the third TCI state, and the target signal includes at least one of the following:
- the SRS resource set that the terminal needs to send is based on the correspondence between the SRS resource set identification information triggered by the first DCI and the first TCI state, and The TCI status indicated by the target indication field is determined;
- the SRS resources that the terminal needs to send are based on the corresponding relationship between the SRS resource identification information triggered by the first DCI and the first TCI state, and the The TCI status indicated by the target indication field of the first DCI is determined;
- the terminal determines the target TCI state of the target channel and/or the target signal from the M first TCI states based on the target information.
- the process is similar, except that when the first DCI schedules PUSCH, the TCI state indicated by the first field in the first DCI is the joint TCI state and/or UL TCI state; when the first DCI schedules PDSCH, The TCI indicated by the first field in the first DCI The status is joint TCI status and/or DL TCI status. SRS needs to use the UL TCI state.
- the TCI state used for the SRS is determined from the UL TCI state corresponding to the same code point as the DL TCI state.
- the SRS resource set/SRS resources that need to be sent can be determined in the following manner:
- the SRS resource in the SRS resource set and the SRS resource in the second SRS resource set; when the SRS trigger state 3 indicated by the SRS request field in the DCI, the SRS resource in the second SRS resource set is sent.
- the SRS trigger state indicated by the SRS request field in the first DCI corresponds to -When the SRS resource set of the codebook corresponds to the same trigger state), the SRS resource set indicator field (SRS resource set indicator field) in the first DCI indicates that the trigger corresponds to the same trigger state.
- X one or 2 of the 2 SRS resource sets , and indicates the order of the two SRS resource sets.
- the above-mentioned first DCI triggering the SRS may not schedule PUSCH or PDSCH.
- the TCI state used by the SRS triggered by the first DCI can be determined in the following manner.
- the terminal determines the target from the M first TCI states based on the target information.
- Target TCI status of the channel and/or target signal including:
- the terminal determines the TCI state of each SRS resource set in the K SRS resource sets, wherein the target TCI state includes the Kth A TCI state, K is a positive integer; and/or,
- the terminal determines the TCI state of each SRS resource in the K SRS resource sets, wherein the target channel and/or target signal includes the There are K SRS resource sets, and the target TCI state includes the X first TCI states, where X represents the total number of SRS resources included in the K SRS resource sets, and X is a positive integer.
- SRS resources in the same SRS resource set can use the same TCI state, and SRS resources in different SRS resource sets can use different TCI states, or different SRS resources in the same SRS resource set can also use Different TCI status.
- the first field in the first DCI indicates the field for each of the M1/M3 TCI states.
- the target TCI state of the SRS resource can be determined by distinguishing the following situations to determine the TCI state used by each SRS resource:
- a TCI state can be to use the first field to indicate one of the TCI states from the M first TCI states indicated by the network side device, or to first determine N presets from the M first TCI states indicated by the network side device) TCI state, and then use the first field to indicate one TCI state among N preset TCI states) that is the TCI state of all SRS resources in the SRS resource set (such as indicating 1 of 4 TCI states);
- the corresponding relationship between the above L TCI states and L SRS resources can be indicated by signaling of the network side device, such as indicating that the first SRS resource corresponds to the first TCI state or the first TCI among the L. state, and so on, or the corresponding relationship between the above L TCI states and L SRS resources does not require signaling instructions from the network side device, but is based on the ordering of SRS resource ID and TCI state (the ordering of TCI state can be Corresponding to the sorting of all TCI state IDs corresponding to a codepoint (codepoint), or the sorting between codepoints (codepoints) corresponding to each TCI state), such as: the smallest SRS resource ID corresponds to the first of L TCI states TCI state;
- the first field indicates K TCI states (the first field can be used to indicate K of the M first TCI states indicated by the network side device) TCI state, or first determine N preset TCI states from the M first TCI states indicated by the network side device, and then use the first field to indicate K TCI states among the N preset TCI states), which are used for each
- the TCI state of the SRS resource in the SRS resource set for example: the first TCI state is used as the TCI state of the SRS resource in the first SRS resource set, and the second TCI state is used as the TCI state of the SRS resource in the second SRS resource set. , and so on.
- the corresponding relationship between the above K SRS resource sets and K TCI states can also be indicated through signaling by the network side device, such as indicating that the first set corresponds to the first TCI state or the first TCI state among the K. , and so on; or the corresponding relationship does not require signaling instructions from the network side device, but corresponds to the order of SRS resource set ID and TCI state.
- the smallest SRS resource set ID corresponds to the first TCI state among K.
- Method 2 The following embodiment also proposes an implementation method that can use the same method to determine the TCI state used by each SRS for SRS with any time domain behavior (such as periodic, semi-persistent, aperiodic):
- the network uses first signaling (such as RRC signaling or MAC CE command or DCI signaling) to indicate one or more TCI states used by each SRS resource set/resource.
- first signaling such as RRC signaling or MAC CE command or DCI signaling
- N preset TCI states are determined from M first TCI states using network instructions or protocol agreements, or M first TCI states are used, and N preset TCI states are determined based on the first signaling or The TCI state for each SRS resource set/resource among the M first TCI states.
- the SRS resource set IDs are sorted from small to large, proceed one by one.
- either one first TCI state corresponds to multiple SRS resource sets, or multiple first TCI states correspond to one SRS resource set.
- the SRS resources in the SRS resource set also have a corresponding relationship with the multiple TCI states, which can be the SRS resource ID from small to large and the multiple TCI states (or multiple TCI states).
- N preset TCI states from the M first TCI states indicated by the network, and then use a method similar to the above method 2a) to determine the N preset TCI states and SRS resource set according to the network instructions.
- the corresponding relationship, and/or, according to N preset TCI states and SRS resources The corresponding relationship determines the target TCI state of SRS.
- m is the number of first TCI states suitable for the target channel and/or target signal included in the M first TCI states or the N preset TCI states
- K is the number of first identification information corresponding to the target channel and/or target signal
- the terminal determines the target TCI state of the target channel and/or the target signal from the M first TCI states according to the target information, including:
- the terminal determines that the target TCI state of the target channel and/or target signal includes the m first TCI states; and/or,
- the terminal determines the K TCI states among the m first TCI states that are located at preset positions or indicated by the first indication information from the network side device as the target TCI status of the target channel and/or target signal; and/or,
- the terminal determines the m first TCI states as the TCI states of the target channels and/or target signals corresponding to the m first identification information.
- the terminal determines that the target TCI state includes the m first TCI states and the original (K-m) TCI states of the target channel and/or target signal.
- the above-mentioned first indication information can be used to indicate part of the first TCI states.
- N preset TCI states are first indicated from M first TCI states.
- the K TCI states can be all or part of the N preset TCI states.
- the above K TCI states can also be K ones arranged at preset positions among the M first TCI states/N preset TCI states. , such as: the top K ones, or the above-mentioned first indication information can be used to indicate the first TCI state corresponding to the K target channels and/or the target signal.
- the above-mentioned second indication information may be used to indicate the target channel and/or target signal that the terminal needs to send, or to indicate the target channel and/or target signal corresponding to the m first TCI states.
- the network side device is configured with K SRS resource sets or SRS resources whose usage is codebook or noncodebook. If the network side device indicates M1 ⁇ 1 joint TCI state or M3 ⁇ 1 UL TCI state (that is, m equals M1 or M3), then the K SRS resources
- M1 ⁇ 1 joint TCI state or M3 ⁇ 1 UL TCI state that is, m equals M1 or M3
- K m, then according to the order of m UL unified TCI state and the order of K SRS resource set/SRS resource, or according to the corresponding relationship between m UL unified TCI state and K SRS resource set/SRS resource , one-to-one correspondence between m and K SRS resource set/SRS resource;
- K SRS resource set/SRS resource corresponds m UL unified TCI states one-to-one, other SRS resource set/SRS resource are not transmitted, among which, K SRS resource set/SRS resource
- the first m of them may be the SRS resource set/SRS resource that the terminal needs to send as determined in the above embodiment, or the SRS resource set/SRS resource using m UL unified TCI states as indicated by the network side device; at this time, for The remaining (K-m) SRS resource set/SRS resource does not need to be sent.
- K SRS resource set/SRS resource corresponds to K UL unified TCI state one-to-one, among which, K UL unified TCI state can be the top K among M1/M3 UL unified TCI states.
- the network side equipment indicates or the N preset TCI states agreed in the protocol include K UL unified TCI states, or the network side equipment configuration indicates the UL unified TCI states used by K SRS resource set/SRS resource respectively; at this time , the remaining (K-m) UL unified TCI states can be used for other channels or signals.
- the terminal determines the target TCI state of the target channel and/or the target signal from the M first TCI states, including:
- the terminal updates the first preset TCI state among the original TCI states of the target channel and/or target signal according to the first TCI state, and obtains the target TCI state of the target channel and/or target signal.
- the first preset TCI state is one of the original TCI states of the target channel and/or the target signal; or,
- the terminal determines that the target channel or target signal performs single beam or single TRP transmission based on the 1 first TCI state; or,
- the terminal determines that the target channel and/or the target signal share the first TCI state.
- the terminal determines that the target channel and/or the target signal is transmitted in a single beam or a single TRP based on the 1 first TCI state, including:
- the terminal determines that the target channel and/or target signal that needs to be transmitted includes the first The target channel and/or target signal associated with the TCI status; or,
- the target channel and/or target signal that the terminal determines needs to be transmitted include the target channel and/or target signal associated with the target resource corresponding to the one first TCI state;
- the target resources include at least one of the following:
- Cell identity Physical cell identity, bandwidth part (BWP) identity, sending and receiving point TRP identity, public TCI status pool identity, public TCI status type value, CORESET group identity, CORESET identity, channel group identity, CORESET pool identity, Search space set identifier, search space ID, synchronization signal block SSB ID, SSB group ID.
- BWP bandwidth part
- the target channel/target signal and its target TCI state can be determined according to the following method:
- the preset TCI state can be one of the TCI states indicated by the network and currently used by the target channel/target signal, or by The protocol agreement or default method fixes the preset TCI state to a certain TCI state among the TCI states currently used by the target channel/target signal (such as the first TCI state), and the unupdated TCI state remains unchanged, where,
- the target channel/target signal corresponds to the above-mentioned preset TCI state (such as the network side device indicates the corresponding relationship, or the protocol stipulates the corresponding relationship);
- the SRS resource set/SRS resource associated with the TCI state or the TRP corresponding to the TCI state uses the TCI state.
- the remaining SRS resource set/SRS resource stops sending.
- the network side device only instructs the terminal to send the SRS resource set/SRS resource associated with the TCI state or the TRP corresponding to the TCI state.
- the target channel/target signal includes the SRS resource set/SRS resource corresponding to the TCI state, or the target channel/target signal includes the SRS resource set/SRS resource associated with the TRP corresponding to the TCI state.
- All SRS resource set/SRS resource use this TCI state, that is, the target channel/target signal includes all SRS resource set/SRS resource.
- the same method can be used to determine the target TCI state for SRS with any time domain behavior (such as periodic, semi-persistent, aperiodic).
- Scenario 2 Determine the TCI state information of the CSI-RS according to the indicated unified TCI state.
- CSI-RS can be beam management, TRS, CSI acquisition, etc.
- One or more CSI-RS resource groups can be configured in a CSI-RS resource set, and each CSI-RS resource group can include one or more CSI-RS resources.
- the network side device when the network side device configures CSI-RS to use unified TCI state, it can configure each CSI-RS resource set, or each CSI-RS resource group, or each CSI-RS resource.
- the correspondence between the first TCI state and the first identification information may be the correspondence between the CSI-RS resource set ID or the CSI-RS resource group ID or the CSI-RS resource ID and the first TCI state.
- the correspondence between the first TCI state and the first identification information is the correspondence between the CSI-RS resource set ID and the first TCI state
- all CSI-RS resources in a CSI-RS resource set The same TCI status can be used; if the correspondence between the first TCI status and the first identification information is the correspondence between the CSI-RS resource group ID and the first TCI status, then within a CSI-RS resource group All CSI-RS resources can use the same TCI status; if the correspondence between the first TCI status and the first identification information is the correspondence between the CSI-RS resource ID and the first TCI status, then each CSI-RS resources can use different TCI states.
- the CSI-RS may be periodic CSI-RS or aperiodic CSI-RS or semi-persistent CSI-RS. Two methods are provided below to determine the target TCI status of CSI-RS:
- Method 1 For aperiodic CSI-RS, use a different method from CSI-RS with other time domain behaviors to determine the target TCI state:
- the target TCI state of the aperiodic CSI-RS can be determined according to at least one of the following:
- the target indication field indicates the TCI status of the PUSCH scheduled by the first DCI
- the M first TCI statuses include A TCI state corresponding to the same code point as the second TCI state and the second TCI state, where the second TCI state includes the TCI state of the PUSCH scheduled by the first DCI
- the terminal determines the target TCI state of the target channel and/or the target signal from the M first TCI states according to the target information, including:
- Determining the target TCI state of the target signal by the terminal includes corresponding to the second TCI state.
- the TCI state of the same code point or the second TCI state, wherein the target signal includes at least one of the following:
- the CSI-RS resource set that the terminal needs to send is based on the CSI-RS resource set identification information triggered by the first DCI and the first TCI. Correspondence between states, and determination of the TCI state indicated by the target indication field;
- the CSI-RS resource group that the terminal needs to send is based on the CSI-RS resource group identification information triggered by the first DCI and the first Correspondence between TCI states, and determination of the TCI state indicated by the target indication field of the first DCI;
- the CSI-RS in the CSI-RS resources that the terminal needs to send are based on the combination of the CSI-RS resource identification information triggered by the first DCI and the first TCI state.
- the second TCI state can include joint TCI state and/or UL TCI state. Since CSI-RS needs to use DL TCI state, the above-mentioned TCI state corresponding to the same code point as the second TCI state can include Joint TCI state or separate UL state. TCI corresponds to separate DL TCI state of the same code point.
- the second field in the first DCI indicates the TCI state used for PUSCH among the M1 joint TCI states, and the indicated TCI state is also used to determine the target TCI state of the CSI-RS;
- the second field in the first DCI indicates the UL TCI state for PUSCH among the M3 separate UL TCI states.
- the TCI state of PUSCH can be determined. Then, use the DL TCI state corresponding to the same codepoint as the UL TCI state to determine the target TCI state of the CSI-RS; or,
- N preset TCIs from the M first TCI states according to instructions from the network side device. state, and then determine the target TCI state of the CSI-RS from N preset TCI states.
- the above-described process of determining the target TCI state of the CSI-RS triggered by the first DCI of the scheduled PUSCH is similar to the above-described process of determining the target TCI state of the SRS triggered by the first DCI of the scheduled PDSCH.
- the identification information of CSI-RS may include CSI-RS resource group identification information, that is, a CSI-RS resource set may include at least one CSI-RS resource group, and a CSI-RS resource group may include at least one CSI-RS resource
- the determination process of the target TCI state of the CSI-RS may refer to the determination process of the target TCI state of the SRS in the above embodiment, which will not be described again here.
- the target indication field indicates the TCI status of the PDSCH scheduled by the first DCI
- the M first TCI statuses include The TCI status of the PDSCH scheduled by the first DCI
- the terminal determines the target TCI state of the target channel and/or the target signal from the M first TCI states according to the target information, including:
- the terminal determines that the target TCI state of the target signal includes the TCI state indicated by the target indication field, and the target signal includes at least one of the following:
- the CSI-RS resource set that the terminal needs to send is based on the CSI-RS resource set identification information triggered by the first DCI and the first TCI. Correspondence between states, and determination of the TCI state indicated by the target indication field;
- the CSI-RS resource group that the terminal needs to send is based on the CSI-RS resource group identification information triggered by the first DCI and the first Correspondence between TCI states, and determination of the TCI state indicated by the target indication field of the first DCI;
- the CSI-RS in the CSI-RS resources that the terminal needs to send are based on the combination of the CSI-RS resource identification information triggered by the first DCI and the first TCI state.
- the second field in the first DCI indicates the TCI state for PDSCH among the M1/M2 TCI states (it can be one or more), then the TCI state indicated by the second field is also used to determine the Used for at least one of the following:
- the determination method can be based on the corresponding relationship between the CSI-RS resource set or the CSI-RS resource group/resource in the CSI-RS resource set and the M1/M2 TCI states, or the CSI-RS resource set or the CSI in the CSI-RS resource set. -The corresponding relationship between RS resource group/resource and N preset TCI states.
- the number indicated by the second field TCI state corresponds one-to-one with CSI-RS resource set or CSI-RS resource group or CSI-RS resource, or the TCI state indicated by the second field corresponds to the CSI-RS resource of the CSI-RS resource group and does not belong to any CSI-RS
- the CSI-RS resources of the resource group correspond one to one, so that each CSI-RS uses the corresponding TCI state indicated by the second field.
- the TCI state of the CSI-RS resource in the CSI-RS resource set corresponds to the TCI state indicated by the second field.
- the second field instructs PDSCH to use 1 TCI state among M1/M2 TCI states.
- the CSI-RS resource in the triggered CSI-RS resource set also uses this TCI state.
- the network is only configured with 1 TCI state at this time.
- CSI-RS resource set is only configured with 1 TCI state at this time.
- the network instructs PDSCH to use 1 TCI state out of M1/M2 TCI states, and the network is pre-configured or the protocol agrees that CSI-RS resource set/resource group/resource has a corresponding relationship with M1/M2 TCI states, then only send The CSI-RS resource set/resource in the triggered CSI-RS resource set corresponding to the TCI state indicated by the second field CSI-RS in group/resource.
- the second field instructs PDSCH to use K TCI states among M1/M2 TCI states, triggering 1 CSI-RS resource set.
- the CSI-RS resource set includes K1 CSI-RS resource groups, or includes K2 CSI-RS resources, or including K1 CSI-RS resource groups and K3 CSI-RS resources that do not belong to any K1 CSI-RS resource groups, then when K ⁇ K1, K TCI states are used as CSI-RS resources respectively.
- the TCI states of K1 CSI-RS resource groups in the RS resource set when K ⁇ K2, the K TCI states are used as the TCI states of K2 CSI-RS resources respectively; when K ⁇ K1+K3, the K TCI states are respectively Used as the TCI state of the CSI-RS resource in the K1 CSI-RS resource group and the K3 CSI-RS resource.
- the second field instructs PDSCH to use K>1 TCI state among M1/M2 TCI states, triggering K CSI-RS resource sets, and K TCI states are used as CSI-RS in each CSI-RS resource set.
- TCI state of RS resource is a configurable period of time.
- the above-mentioned determination process of the target TCI state of the CSI-RS triggered by the first DCI of the scheduled PDSCH can be similar to the above-mentioned determination process of the target TCI state of the SRS triggered by the first DCI of the scheduled PUSCH, and will not be used here. Again.
- the terminal determines from the M first TCIs according to the target information
- the target TCI status of the target channel and/or target signal is determined in the status, including:
- the terminal determines the TCI state of each CSI-RS resource set in the K CSI-RS resource sets, wherein the target The TCI state includes the K first TCI states, K is a positive integer; and/or,
- the terminal The corresponding relationship between the K CSI-RS resource sets and the X first TCI states determines the TCI state of each CSI-RS resource group in the K CSI-RS resource sets, wherein the target The TCI state includes the X first TCI states, where X represents the K CSI-RS The total number of CSI-RS resource groups included in the resource set, X is a positive integer; and/or,
- the terminal determines the TCI state of each CSI-RS resource in the K CSI-RS resource sets, wherein the target TCI
- the status includes the H first TCI status, where H represents the total number of CSI-RS resources in the CSI-RS resource group included in the K CSI-RS resource set, and H is a positive integer.
- the first DCI triggers aperiodic CSI-RS, but does not schedule PUSCH or PDSCH.
- TCI state the target TCI state for each CSI-RS resource can be determined among the M1/M2 TCI states according to the instructions of the second field of the first DCI:
- the second field indicates the TCI state (indicated from M1/M2, or from the N preset TCI states in M1/M2), which are used as K CSI- TCI state of RS resource set (the CSI-RS resource in each CSI-RS resource set corresponds to a TCI state), or used as the TCI state of K1 CSI-RS resource groups respectively (that is, in each CSI-RS resource group
- the CSI-RS resource corresponds to a TCI state), or used as the TCI state of K3 CSI-RS resources, or used as the CSI-RS resource and K3 CSI-RS resources in the K1 CSI-RS resource group. TCI state.
- the correspondence between K1 CSI-RS resource group and/or K3 CSI-RS resource and TCI state can be indicated through network signaling; or the correspondence does not require network signaling instructions, but is based on CSI-RS resource group ID and/or CSI-RS resource ID correspond to the ordering of TCI states.
- the minimum CSI-RS resource group ID/resource ID corresponds to the top TCI state, where the ordering of TCI states refers to the order of DL TCI states. .
- the identification information may include CSI-RS resource group identification information, that is, a CSI-RS resource set may include at least one CSI-RS resource group, and a CSI-RS resource group may include at least one CSI-RS resource.
- a All CSI-RS resources in a CSI-RS resource set can use the same TCI state, or CSI-RS resources in different CSI-RS resource groups in a CSI-RS resource set can use different TCI states, or, Each different CSI-RS resource can use different TCI states, which will not be described again here.
- Method 2 The following embodiment also proposes an implementation method that can use the same method to determine the TCI state used by each CSI-RS for CSI-RS with any time domain behavior (such as periodic, semi-persistent, and aperiodic). :
- the network uses second signaling (such as RRC signaling or MAC CE command or DCI signaling) to instruct each CSI-RS resource set/resource group/resource to use one or more TCI states of N preset TCI states.
- second signaling such as RRC signaling or MAC CE command or DCI signaling
- N preset TCI states are determined from M1/M2/M3 unified TCI states according to network instructions or protocol agreements.
- unified TCI state joint or DL TCI state
- codepoint or the order of codepoints corresponding to each unified TCI state
- CSI-RS resource set/resource group/resource The IDs are sorted from small to large, performing one-to-one correspondence, one-to-many correspondence, and many-to-one correspondence.
- the CSI-RS resource group/resource in the CSI-RS resource set also has a corresponding relationship with the multiple TCI states, which can be CSI-RS resource group ID/
- the resource ID is arranged in ascending order from small to large and the multiple TCI states (or codepoints corresponding to multiple TCI states).
- the correspondence between CSI-RS resource group or CSI-RS resource and DL unified TCI state includes one of the following:
- K m, one-to-one correspondence or configuration correspondence in sequence
- the first m of K CSI-RS resource groups or CSI-RS resources correspond to m DL unified TCI states one-to-one, or the network configuration indicates m CSI-RS resources m DL unified TCI to be used by group or CSI-RS resource.
- Other CSI-RS resource groups or CSI-RS resources are not transmitted.
- K CSI-RS resource groups or CSI-RS resources correspond to K DL TCI states one-to-one. These K DL TCI states are determined according to the instructions of the network side device or protocol agreement, or the default is m The top K DL TCI states.
- the terminal determines the target TCI state of the target channel and/or the target signal from the M first TCI states.
- the implementation is also applicable to CSI-RS.
- the CSI-RS and its target TCI state can be determined according to the following method:
- the default TCI state can be a certain TCI state among the TCI states currently used by the CSI-RS as indicated by the network, or by agreement or default
- the preset TCI state is fixed to a certain TCI state among the TCI states currently used by CSI-RS (such as the first TCI state), and the unupdated TCI state remains unchanged.
- CSI-RS is the same as the above preset TCI state. Assume that TCI state corresponds (such as the network side device indicates the corresponding relationship, or the protocol stipulates the corresponding relationship);
- the CSI-RS resource set/resource group/resource associated with the TCI state or the TRP corresponding to the TCI state uses the TCI state.
- the remaining CSI-RS resource set/resource group/resource stops sending.
- the network side device only indicates the CSI-RS resource set/resource group/resource associated with the TCI state or the TRP corresponding to the TCI state sent to the terminal.
- the target channel/target signal includes the CSI-RS resource set/resource group/resource corresponding to the TCI state, or the target channel/target signal includes the CSI-RS resource set/resource associated with the TRP corresponding to the TCI state. group/resource.
- All CSI-RS resource set/resource group/resource use this TCI state, that is, the target channel/target signal includes all CSI-RS resource set/resource group/resource.
- the target TCI state can be determined in the same manner as SRS.
- Scenario 3 Determine the target TCI state of the PDCCH according to the indicated unified TCI state.
- the terminal determines the target TCI state of the target channel and/or the target signal from the M first TCI states based on the target information, include:
- the terminal determines a target TCI state of a preset CORESET or a preset CORESET group or a preset search space set corresponding to the PDCCH from the M first TCI states according to the target information;
- the original TCI state of the preset CORESET, the preset CORESET group, or the preset search space set is associated with the second identifier
- the target TCI state of the preset CORESET, the preset CORESET group, or the preset search space set is associated with the third Three identifiers.
- the terminal switches the preset CORESET or the preset CORESET group or the preset search space set to be associated with the third identification; or,
- the terminal switches the preset CORESET or the preset CORESET group or the preset search space set to the target resource transmission associated with the third identification; or,
- the terminal switches from the target resource associated with the second identification to the target resource associated with the third identification.
- the target resource includes at least one of the following:
- Cell identity physical cell identity (Physical Cell Identifier, PCI), bandwidth part (Bandwidth Part, BWP) identity, sending and receiving point TRP identity, public TCI status pool identity, public TCI status type value, CORESET group identity, CORESET identity, channel Group ID, CORESET pool ID, search space set ID, search space ID, synchronization signal block SSB ID, SSB group ID.
- PCI Physical Cell Identifier
- BWP bandwidth part
- N preset TCI states can be selected from M1/M2 TCI states according to network instructions or protocol agreements, and then CORESET or CORESET or CORESET can be determined from N preset TCI states according to network instructions or protocol agreements.
- the target TCI state of the CORESET group or search space set is determined.
- the network indicates 4 unified TCI states (joint unified TCI state or DL unified TCI state), and determines the first 2 as the default TCI state.
- the network side device can indicate these 2 One or two of the TCI states serve as the TCI state of CORESET; or indicate that the two TCI states correspond to two CORESET groups respectively.
- the third identifier associated with the target TCI state of the preset CORESET or CORESET group or search space set is the third identifier associated with the original TCI state of the preset CORESET or CORESET group or search space set.
- Scenario 4 Determine the target TCI state of PDSCH according to the indicated unified TCI state.
- the target indication field (such as the third field) of the first DCI indicates the first TCI status for the PDSCH and/or,
- the target indication field of the first DCI indicates the corresponding relationship between at least two pieces of identification information of the PDSCH and at least two first TCI states.
- the first TCI state indicated by the target indication field (ie, the third field) of the first DCI may be any TCI state among the M first TCI states.
- the third field in the first DCI can indicate the TCI state used for PDSCH among the M1/M2 TCI states.
- the network indicates a total of 4 first TCI states, and the third field indicates that the first TCI state is used for PDSCH, or the network indicates a total of 4 first TCI states, and the third field indicates the first TCI state.
- One and third first TCI states are used for PDSCH.
- N preset TCI states can also be determined first from M first TCI states, and then the target indication field of the first DCI is used to indicate any TCI state among the N preset TCI states. For example: Select N preset TCI states from M1/M2 TCI states according to network instructions or protocol agreements, and then use the third field in the first DCI to indicate the PDSCH among the N preset TCI states. Target TCI state.
- the third field may also indicate a correspondence between at least two identification information of the PDSCH and the at least two first TCI states to clarify each of the PDSCH. Correspondence between identification information and the first TCI state.
- the third field in the first DCI can also indicate the order of TCI state used for PDSCH.
- this sequence can be used to determine multiple DMRS groups, DMRS ports, frequency domain resources, and TCI states of multiple layers of PDSCH.
- the corresponding relationship between at least two pieces of identification information of the PDSCH and at least two first TCI states includes at least one of the following:
- the corresponding relationship between the arrangement order of the first TCI state and the first arrangement order, the first arrangement order includes at least one of the following:
- the parity order of the PDSCH layers is the parity order of the PDSCH layers.
- the corresponding relationship between the order of the above TCI state and the multiple DMRS groups, DMRS ports, frequency domain resources, and multiple layers of the PDSCH may be indicated by the network side device, or may be pre-agreed in the protocol.
- the arrangement order of TCI state corresponds to the order of the fourth information of PDSCH
- the order of arrangement of TCI state corresponds to the order of the fourth information of PDSCH (such as DMRS group ID or frequency domain resources from low to high, DMRS group ID or frequency domain resource (PRB) or layer order from odd to even, layer order from low to high, etc.) corresponds, for example: the TCI state ranked first corresponds to the DMRS group ID with the smallest value.
- Scenario 5 Determine the target TCI state of PUSCH based on the indicated unified TCI state.
- the target indication field of the first DCI indicates the first TCI status for the PUSCH and/or the target indication of the first DCI
- the field indicates the corresponding relationship between at least two pieces of identification information of the PUSCH and at least two first TCI states.
- the corresponding relationship between at least two pieces of identification information of the PUSCH and at least two first TCI states includes at least one of the following:
- the fourth information including: at least one of DMRS group, DMRS port, frequency domain resource and layer;
- the corresponding relationship between the arrangement order of the first TCI state and the first arrangement order, the first arrangement order includes at least one of the following:
- the parity order of the PUSCH layers is the parity order of the PUSCH layers.
- the specific process of determining the target TCI state of PUSCH based on the indicated unified TCI state can be referred to Scenario 4.
- the specific process of determining the target TCI state of PDSCH based on the indicated unified TCI state will not be described again here.
- the uplink transmission can also include SRS resource set, PUCCH resource , PUSCH) using 1 or 2 TCI states among the M1 joint TCI states, or using 1 or 2 UL TCI states among the separate UL TCI states corresponding to the M2 separate DL TCI states.
- the terminal obtains the common beam information indicated by the network side device, wherein the common beam information includes M first TCI states, M is a positive integer; the terminal obtains the M first TCI states from the Determine the target channel and/or the target TCI state of the target signal; wherein, the target channel includes: at least one of the physical uplink control channel PUCCH, the physical downlink control channel PDCCH, the physical downlink shared channel PDSCH and the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH. item; or, the target signal includes: at least one of a sounding reference signal SRS and a channel state information reference signal CSI-RS.
- the target channel includes: at least one of the physical uplink control channel PUCCH, the physical downlink control channel PDCCH, the physical downlink shared channel PDSCH and the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH. item; or, the target signal includes: at least one of a sounding reference signal SRS and a channel state information reference signal CSI-RS.
- PUCCH, PDCCH, PDSCH, PUSCH, SRS and CSI-RS can share the M first TCI states indicated by the network side equipment.
- the complexity of beam indication is reduced. degree.
- FIG. 3 Another TCI status determination method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- the biggest difference between this method and the method embodiment shown in Figure 2 is that the execution subject of the method embodiment shown in Figure 2 is a terminal, and The execution subject of the method embodiment shown in Figure 3 is a network-side device, and the various steps performed by the network-side device are the same or corresponding to the various steps performed by the terminal in the method embodiment shown in Figure 2. Therefore, as shown in Figure 3
- the execution subject of the method embodiment shown in Figure 2 is a terminal
- the execution subject of the method embodiment shown in Figure 3 is a network-side device, and the various steps performed by the network-side device are the same or corresponding to the various steps performed by the terminal in the method embodiment shown in Figure 2. Therefore, as shown in Figure 3
- the execution subject of the method embodiment shown in Figure 2 is a terminal
- the execution subject of the method embodiment shown in Figure 3 is a network-side device, and the various steps performed by the network-side device are the same or corresponding to the various steps performed by the terminal in
- the TCI status determination method that can be applied to network-side devices may include the following steps:
- Step 301 The network side device indicates common beam information to the terminal, where the common beam information includes M first TCI states, and M is a positive integer.
- Step 302 The network side device determines the target channel and/or the target TCI state of the target signal from the M first TCI states; wherein the target channel includes: physical uplink control channel PUCCH, physical downlink control channel At least one of PDCCH, physical downlink shared channel PDSCH and physical uplink shared channel PUSCH; or, the target signal includes: at least one of sounding reference signal SRS and channel state information reference signal CSI-RS.
- the target channel includes: physical uplink control channel PUCCH, physical downlink control channel At least one of PDCCH, physical downlink shared channel PDSCH and physical uplink shared channel PUSCH; or, the target signal includes: at least one of sounding reference signal SRS and channel state information reference signal CSI-RS.
- the network side device determines the target TCI state of the target channel or target signal from the M first TCI states, including:
- the network side device determines the target channel and/or the target TCI state of the target signal from the M first TCI states according to target information, wherein the target information includes at least one of the following:
- the first identification information being used to identify at least one of the target channel and/or the target signal
- the value of the first identification information corresponding to the target channel and/or target signal is the value of the first identification information corresponding to the target channel and/or target signal
- the type of target channel and/or target signal is the type of target channel and/or target signal
- the target channel and/or the transmission mode of the target signal are The target channel and/or the transmission mode of the target signal
- the time domain behavior of the target channel and/or target signal is the time domain behavior of the target channel and/or target signal
- First information or second information the first information indicates that the first downlink control information DCI schedules PUSCH or PDSCH, the second information indicates that the first DCI does not schedule PUSCH or PDSCH, and the first DCI is used to trigger The target signal or scheduling the target channel;
- the target indication field of the first DCI is used to indicate at least one of the M first TCI states
- the common beam information includes the N preset TCI states, N is a positive integer less than or equal to M;
- the first identification information includes at least one of the following:
- the frequency domain resource identification information of the target channel
- the layer identification information of the target channel is the layer identification information of the target channel.
- the corresponding relationship between the first TCI state and the first identification information includes at least one of the following:
- M is an integer greater than 2.
- the TCI determination method further includes:
- the network side device determines the N preset TCI states from the M first TCI states according to third information, wherein the third information is indicated by the network side device or agreed by the protocol;
- the network side device determines the target TCI state of the target channel and/or the target signal from the M first TCI states according to the target information, including:
- the network side device determines the target TCI state of the target channel and/or the target signal from the N preset TCI states according to the target information.
- the target indication field indicates the TCI status of the PUSCH scheduled by the first DCI
- the M first TCI statuses include the TCI status of the PUSCH scheduled by the first DCI
- the network side device determines the target TCI state of the target channel and/or the target signal from the M first TCI states according to the target information, including:
- the network side device determines that the target TCI state of the target signal includes the TCI state indicated by the target indication field, and the target signal includes at least one of the following:
- the SRS resource set that the terminal needs to send is based on the correspondence between the SRS resource set identification information triggered by the first DCI and the first TCI state, and The TCI status indicated by the target indication field is determined;
- the SRS resources that the terminal needs to send are based on the corresponding relationship between the SRS resource identification information triggered by the first DCI and the first TCI state, and the The TCI status indicated by the target indication field of the first DCI is determined;
- the target indication field indicates the TCI status of the PUSCH scheduled by the first DCI
- the M first TCI statuses include A TCI state corresponding to the same code point as the second TCI state and the second TCI state, where the second TCI state includes the TCI state of the PUSCH scheduled by the first DCI
- the network side device determines the target TCI state of the target channel and/or the target signal from the M first TCI states according to the target information, including:
- the network side device determines that the target TCI state of the target signal includes a TCI state corresponding to the same code point as the second TCI state or the second TCI state, and the target signal includes at least one of the following:
- the CSI-RS resource set that the terminal needs to send is based on the CSI-RS resource set identification information triggered by the first DCI and the first TCI. Correspondence between states, and determination of the TCI state indicated by the target indication field;
- the CSI-RS in the CSI-RS resource group that the terminal needs to send is based on the CSI-RS resource group identification information triggered by the first DCI and the first The corresponding relationship between the TCI status and the target indication field of the first DCI indicates TCI status determined;
- the CSI-RS in the CSI-RS resources that the terminal needs to send are based on the combination of the CSI-RS resource identification information triggered by the first DCI and the first TCI state.
- the target indication field indicates the TCI status of the PDSCH scheduled by the first DCI
- the M first TCI statuses include The TCI status of the PDSCH scheduled by the first DCI
- the network side device determines the target TCI state of the target channel and/or the target signal from the M first TCI states according to the target information, including:
- the network side device determines that the target TCI state of the target signal includes the TCI state indicated by the target indication field, and the target signal includes at least one of the following:
- the CSI-RS resource set that the terminal needs to send is based on the CSI-RS resource set identification information triggered by the first DCI and the first TCI. Correspondence between states, and determination of the TCI state indicated by the target indication field;
- the CSI-RS resource group that the terminal needs to send is based on the CSI-RS resource group identification information triggered by the first DCI and the first Correspondence between TCI states, and determination of the TCI state indicated by the target indication field of the first DCI;
- the CSI-RS in the CSI-RS resources that the terminal needs to send is based on the CSI-RS resource identification information triggered by the first DCI and the first TCI state.
- the target indication field indicates the TCI state of the PDSCH scheduled by the first DCI.
- the M first TCI states include a TCI state corresponding to the same code point as the third TCI state and the third TCI state.
- the third TCI state The three TCI states include the TCI state of the PDSCH scheduled by the first DCI;
- the network side device determines the target TCI state of the target channel and/or the target signal from the M first TCI states according to the target information, including:
- the network side device determines that the target TCI state of the target signal includes a TCI state corresponding to the same code point as the third TCI state or the third TCI state, and the target signal includes at least one of the following:
- the SRS resource set that the terminal needs to send is based on the correspondence between the SRS resource set identification information triggered by the first DCI and the first TCI state, and The TCI status indicated by the target indication field is determined;
- the SRS resources that the terminal needs to send are based on the corresponding relationship between the SRS resource identification information triggered by the first DCI and the first TCI state, and the The TCI status indicated by the target indication field of the first DCI is determined;
- m is the number of first TCI states suitable for the target channel and/or target signal included in the M first TCI states or the N preset TCI states
- K is the number of first identification information corresponding to the target channel and/or target signal
- the network side device determines the target TCI state of the target channel and/or the target signal from the M first TCI states according to the target information, including:
- the network side device determines that the target TCI state of the target channel and/or target signal includes the m first TCI states; and/or,
- the network side device determines the K that is in the m first TCI states and is located at a preset position or indicated by the first indication information sent by the network side device to the terminal.
- TCI state determined as the target TCI state of the target channel and/or target signal; and/or,
- the network side device determines the m first TCI states as the TCI states of the target channels and/or target signals corresponding to the m first identification information, and the m first
- the identification information is the m pieces of first identification information among the K pieces of first identification information and is arranged in a preset position or indicated by the second indication information sent by the network side device to the terminal; and/ or,
- the network side device determines that the target TCI state includes the m first TCI states and the original (K-m) TCI states of the target channel and/or target signal.
- the network side device selects from the M first TCI states according to the target information. Determine the target TCI status of the target channel and/or target signal, including:
- the network side device determines the TCI state of each SRS resource set in the K SRS resource sets, wherein the target TCI state includes the K The first TCI state, K is a positive integer; and/or,
- the network side device determines the TCI state of each SRS resource in the K SRS resource sets, wherein the target channel and/or target signal includes For the K SRS resource sets, the target TCI state includes the X first TCI states, where X represents the total number of SRS resources included in the K SRS resource sets, and X is a positive integer.
- the network side device selects the M-th signal from the target signal based on the target information.
- Determine the target TCI state of the target channel and/or target signal in a TCI state including:
- the network side device determines whether the first DCI is used to trigger K CSI-RS resource sets, the first DCI does not schedule PDSCH or PUSCH, and the target indication field of the first DCI indicates K first TCI states, then the network side device According to the corresponding relationship between the K CSI-RS resource sets and the K first TCI states, the TCI state of each CSI-RS resource set in the K CSI-RS resource sets is determined, wherein, The target TCI state includes the K first TCI states, K is a positive integer; and/or,
- the network side device determines the TCI status of each CSI-RS resource group in the K CSI-RS resource set, wherein the target TCI status includes the X first TCI status, where X represents the K
- the total number of CSI-RS resource groups included in the CSI-RS resource set, X is a positive integer; and/or,
- the network side device determines whether the first DCI is used to trigger K CSI-RS resource sets, the first DCI does not schedule PDSCH or PUSCH, and the target indication field of the first DCI indicates H first TCI states, then the network side device According to the corresponding relationship between the K CSI-RS resource sets and the H first TCI states, the TCI state of each CSI-RS resource in the K CSI-RS resource sets is determined, wherein, The target TCI state includes the H first TCI states, where H represents the total number of CSI-RS resources in the CSI-RS resource group included in the K CSI-RS resource sets, and H is a positive integer.
- the network side device determines the target TCI of the target channel and/or the target signal from the M first TCI states according to the target information. status, including:
- the network side device determines the target TCI state of the preset CORESET or the preset CORESET group or the preset search space set corresponding to the PDCCH from the M first TCI states according to the target information;
- the original TCI state of the preset CORESET, the preset CORESET group, or the preset search space set is associated with the second identifier
- the target TCI state of the preset CORESET, the preset CORESET group, or the preset search space set is associated with the third Three identifiers.
- the network side device switches the preset CORESET or the preset CORESET group or the preset search space set to be associated with the third identification; or,
- the network side device switches the preset CORESET or the preset CORESET group or the preset search space set to the target resource transmission associated with the third identifier; or,
- the network side device determines that the terminal switches from the target resource associated with the second identity to the target resource associated with the third identity.
- the target resource includes at least one of the following:
- Cell identification Physical cell identification, bandwidth part BWP identification, sending and receiving point TRP identification, public TCI status pool identification, public TCI status type value, CORESET group identification, CORESET Identification, channel group identification, CORESET pool identification, search space set identification, search space ID, synchronization signal block SSB ID, SSB group ID.
- the target indication field of the first DCI indicates the first TCI used for the PDSCH or PUSCH. status and/or, the target indication field of the first DCI indicates the corresponding relationship between at least two pieces of identification information of the PDSCH or PUSCH and at least two first TCI statuses.
- the corresponding relationship between at least two pieces of identification information of the PDSCH or PUSCH and at least two first TCI states includes at least one of the following:
- the corresponding relationship between the arrangement order of the first TCI state and the first arrangement order, the first arrangement order includes at least one of the following:
- the parity order of the PDSCH or PUSCH layers is the parity order of the PDSCH or PUSCH layers.
- the network side device determines the target TCI state of the target channel and/or the target signal from the M first TCI states, including:
- the network side device updates the first preset TCI state among the original TCI states of the target channel and/or target signal according to the first TCI state, and obtains the target of the target channel and/or target signal.
- TCI state, the first preset TCI state is one of the original TCI states of the target channel and/or the target signal; or,
- the network side device determines that the target channel and/or the target signal performs single beam or single TRP transmission based on the 1 first TCI state; or,
- the network side device determines that the target channel and/or the target signal share the one first TCI state.
- the network side device determines that the target channel and/or target signal is transmitted in a single beam or a single TRP based on the 1 first TCI state, including:
- the network side device determines that the target channel and/or target signal that the terminal needs to transmit includes the target channel and/or target signal associated with the first TCI state; or,
- the network side device determines that the target channel and/or target signal that the terminal needs to transmit includes the target channel and/or target signal associated with the target resource corresponding to the first TCI state;
- the target resources include at least one of the following:
- Cell identity Physical cell identity, bandwidth part BWP identity, sending and receiving point TRP identity, public TCI status pool identity, public TCI state type value, CORESET group identity, CORESET identity, channel group identity, CORESET pool identity, search space set identity, Search space ID, synchronization signal block SSB ID, SSB group ID.
- the M first TCI states include at least one of the following: M1 joint TCI states, M2 independent downlink DL TCI states, and M3 independent uplink UL TCI states.
- a unified TCI framework solution that can be applied in mTRP scenarios is proposed, which can determine the target channel or target in various transmission modes according to the unified TCI state (i.e., the first TCI state) indicated by the network side device.
- the beam information of the signal ensures a consistent understanding of the beam used between the network side device and the terminal.
- the execution subject may be a TCI status determination device.
- the TCI state determination method performed by the TCI state determination apparatus is used as an example to illustrate the TCI state determination apparatus provided by the embodiment of the present application.
- the TCI status determination device 400 may include the following modules:
- the acquisition module 401 is used to acquire the common beam information indicated by the network side device, where the common beam information includes M first TCI states, and M is a positive integer;
- the first determination module 402 is configured to determine the target TCI state of the target channel and/or the target signal from the M first TCI states;
- the target channel includes: at least one of the physical uplink control channel PUCCH, physical downlink control channel PDCCH, physical downlink shared channel PDSCH and physical uplink shared channel PUSCH; or the target signal includes: sounding reference signal SRS and at least one of channel state information reference signals CSI-RS.
- the first determination module 402 is specifically used for:
- the target TCI state of the target channel and/or the target signal is determined from the M first TCI states, wherein the target information includes at least one of the following:
- the first identification information being used to identify at least one of the target channel and/or the target signal
- the value of the first identification information corresponding to the target channel and/or target signal is the value of the first identification information corresponding to the target channel and/or target signal
- the type of target channel and/or target signal is the type of target channel and/or target signal
- the target channel and/or the transmission mode of the target signal are The target channel and/or the transmission mode of the target signal
- the time domain behavior of the target channel and/or target signal is the time domain behavior of the target channel and/or target signal
- First information or second information the first information indicates that the first downlink control information DCI schedules PUSCH or PDSCH, the second information indicates that the first DCI does not schedule PUSCH or PDSCH, and the first DCI is used to trigger The target signal or scheduling the target channel;
- the target indication field of the first DCI is used to indicate at least one of the M first TCI states
- the common beam information includes the N preset TCI states, N is a positive integer less than or equal to M;
- the first identification information includes at least one of the following:
- the frequency domain resource identification information of the target channel
- the layer identification information of the target channel is the layer identification information of the target channel.
- the corresponding relationship between the first TCI state and the first identification information includes at least one of the following:
- M is an integer greater than 2.
- the TCI status determination device 400 also includes:
- a third determination module configured to determine the N preset TCI states from the M first TCI states according to third information, where the third information is indicated by the network side device or agreed by the protocol;
- the first determination module 402 is specifically used for:
- the target TCI state of the target channel and/or the target signal is determined from the N preset TCI states.
- the target indication field indicates the TCI status of the PUSCH scheduled by the first DCI
- the M first TCI statuses include the first DCI TCI status of scheduled PUSCH
- the first determination module 402 is specifically used for:
- Determining the target TCI state of the target signal includes the TCI state indicated by the target indication field,
- the target signal includes at least one of the following:
- the SRS resource set that the terminal needs to send is based on the correspondence between the SRS resource set identification information triggered by the first DCI and the first TCI state, and The TCI status indicated by the target indication field is determined;
- the SRS resources that the terminal needs to send are based on the corresponding relationship between the SRS resource identification information triggered by the first DCI and the first TCI state, and the The TCI status indicated by the target indication field of the first DCI is determined;
- the target indication field indicates the TCI status of the PUSCH scheduled by the first DCI
- the M first TCI statuses include the same as the second TCI status.
- the second TCI state includes the TCI state of the PUSCH scheduled by the first DCI;
- the first determination module 402 is specifically used to:
- Determining the target TCI state of the target signal includes a TCI state corresponding to the same code point as the second TCI state or the second TCI state, wherein the target target signal includes at least one of the following:
- the CSI-RS resource set that the terminal needs to send is based on the CSI-RS resource set identification information triggered by the first DCI and the first TCI. Correspondence between states, and determination of the TCI state indicated by the target indication field;
- the CSI-RS resource group that the terminal needs to send is based on the CSI-RS resource group identification information triggered by the first DCI and the first Correspondence between TCI states, and determination of the TCI state indicated by the target indication field of the first DCI;
- the CSI-RS in the CSI-RS resources that the terminal needs to send are based on the combination of the CSI-RS resource identification information triggered by the first DCI and the first TCI state.
- the target indication field indicates the TCI status of the PDSCH scheduled by the first DCI
- the M first TCI statuses include the first DCI TCI status of scheduled PDSCH
- the first determination module 402 is specifically used to:
- Determining the target TCI state of the target signal includes the TCI state indicated by the target indication field, and the target signal includes at least one of the following:
- the CSI-RS resource set that the terminal needs to send is based on the CSI-RS resource set identification information triggered by the first DCI and the first TCI. Correspondence between states, and determination of the TCI state indicated by the target indication field;
- the CSI-RS resource group that the terminal needs to send is based on the CSI-RS resource group identification information triggered by the first DCI and the first Correspondence between TCI states, and determination of the TCI state indicated by the target indication field of the first DCI;
- the CSI-RS in the CSI-RS resources that the terminal needs to send are based on the combination of the CSI-RS resource identification information triggered by the first DCI and the first TCI state.
- the target indication field indicates the TCI state of the PDSCH scheduled by the first DCI
- the M first TCI states include the same as the third TCI state.
- the third TCI state includes the TCI state of the PDSCH scheduled by the first DCI;
- the first determination module 402 is specifically used to:
- Determining the target TCI state of the target signal includes a TCI state corresponding to the same code point as the third TCI state or the third TCI state, and the target signal includes at least one of the following:
- the SRS resource set that the terminal needs to send is based on the SRS resource set identification information triggered by the first DCI and the first TCI. Correspondence between states, and determination of the TCI state indicated by the target indication field;
- the SRS resources that the terminal needs to send are based on the corresponding relationship between the SRS resource identification information triggered by the first DCI and the first TCI state, and the The TCI status indicated by the target indication field of the first DCI is determined;
- m is the number of first TCI states suitable for the target channel and/or target signal included in the M first TCI states or the N preset TCI states
- K is the target channel. and/or the number of first identification information corresponding to the target signal
- the first determination module 402 is specifically used to:
- the target TCI state of the target channel and/or target signal includes the m first TCI states; and/or,
- the K TCI states among the m first TCI states and located at preset positions or indicated by the first indication information from the network side device are determined as the target channel and /or the target TCI status of the target signal; and/or,
- the m first TCI states are determined as the TCI states of the target channels and/or target signals corresponding to the m pieces of first identification information, and the m first identification information is the m pieces of first identification information among the K pieces of first identification information and arranged in a preset position or indicated by the second indication information from the network side device; and/or,
- Determining the target TCI state includes the m first TCI states and the original (K-m) TCI states of the target channel and/or target signal.
- the first determination module 402 is specifically configured to:
- the first DCI is used to trigger K SRS resource sets, the first DCI does not schedule PDSCH or PUSCH, and the target indication field of the first DCI indicates K first TCI states, then according to the K SRS resources
- the corresponding relationship between the set and the K first TCI states is to determine the TCI state of each SRS resource set in the K SRS resource sets, wherein the target TCI state includes the K first TCI states.
- K is a positive integer; and/or,
- the first DCI is used to trigger K SRS resource sets, the first DCI does not schedule PDSCH or PUSCH, and the target indication field of the first DCI indicates X first TCI states, then according to the The corresponding relationship between the K SRS resource sets and the X first TCI states determines the TCI state of each SRS resource in the K SRS resource sets, wherein the target channel and/or target signal includes For the K SRS resource sets, the target TCI state includes the X first TCI states, where X represents the total number of SRS resources included in the K SRS resource sets, and X is a positive integer.
- the first determination module 402 is specifically configured to:
- the first DCI is used to trigger K CSI-RS resource sets, the first DCI does not schedule PDSCH or PUSCH, and the target indication field of the first DCI indicates K first TCI states, then according to the K
- the corresponding relationship between the CSI-RS resource set and the K first TCI states determines the TCI state of each CSI-RS resource set in the K CSI-RS resource set, wherein the target TCI state includes The K first TCI states, K is a positive integer; and/or,
- the first DCI is used to trigger K CSI-RS resource sets, the first DCI does not schedule PDSCH or PUSCH, and the target indication field of the first DCI indicates X first TCI states, then according to the K
- the corresponding relationship between the CSI-RS resource set and the X first TCI states determines the TCI state of each CSI-RS resource group in the K CSI-RS resource set, where the target TCI state includes The X first TCI states, where X represents the total number of CSI-RS resource groups included in the K CSI-RS resource sets, and X is a positive integer; and/or,
- the first DCI is used to trigger K CSI-RS resource sets, the first DCI does not schedule PDSCH or PUSCH, and the target indication field of the first DCI indicates H first TCI states, then according to the K
- the corresponding relationship between the CSI-RS resource set and the H first TCI states determines the TCI state of each CSI-RS resource in the K CSI-RS resource set, wherein the target TCI state includes all The H first TCI states, where H represents the total number of CSI-RS resources in the CSI-RS resource group included in the K CSI-RS resource sets, and H is a positive integer.
- the first determination module 402 is specifically configured to:
- the target information determine the target TCI state of the preset CORESET or the preset CORESET group or the preset search space set corresponding to the PDCCH from the M first TCI states;
- the original TCI in the default CORESET or default CORESET group or default search space set The state is associated with a second identifier, and the target TCI state of the preset CORESET or the preset CORESET group or the preset search space set is associated with a third identifier, and the second identifier and the third identifier are used to identify the situation of the target resource.
- the TCI status determining device 400 also includes:
- a first association module configured to switch the preset CORESET or preset CORESET group or preset search space set to be associated with the third identification; or,
- a first switching module configured to switch the preset CORESET or preset CORESET group or preset search space set to target resource transmission associated with the third identification; or,
- a second switching module configured to switch from the target resource associated with the second identification to the target resource associated with the third identification.
- the target resource includes at least one of the following:
- Cell identity Physical cell identity, bandwidth part BWP identity, sending and receiving point TRP identity, public TCI status pool identity, public TCI state type value, CORESET group identity, CORESET identity, channel group identity, CORESET pool identity, search space set identity, Search space ID, synchronization signal block SSB ID, SSB group ID.
- the target indication field of the first DCI indicates the first TCI status for the PDSCH or PUSCH and/or,
- the target indication field of the first DCI indicates a correspondence between at least two pieces of identification information of the PDSCH or PUSCH and at least two first TCI states.
- the corresponding relationship between at least two pieces of identification information of the PDSCH or PUSCH and at least two first TCI states includes at least one of the following:
- the fourth information includes: at least one of DMRS group, DMRS port, frequency domain resource and layer;
- the corresponding relationship between the arrangement order of the first TCI state and the first arrangement order, the first arrangement order includes at least one of the following:
- the parity order of the PDSCH or PUSCH layers is the parity order of the PDSCH or PUSCH layers.
- the first determination module 402 is specifically used to:
- the first preset TCI state is one of the original TCI states of the target channel and/or the target signal; or,
- the first determination module 402 includes:
- a first determination unit configured to determine that the target channel and/or target signal that needs to be transmitted includes the target channel and/or target signal associated with the first TCI state; or,
- a second determination unit configured to determine that the target channel and/or target signal that needs to be transmitted includes the target channel and/or target signal associated with the target resource corresponding to the first TCI state;
- the target resources include at least one of the following:
- Cell identity Physical cell identity, bandwidth part BWP identity, sending and receiving point TRP identity, public TCI status pool identity, public TCI state type value, CORESET group identity, CORESET identity, channel group identity, CORESET pool identity, search space set identity, Search space ID, synchronization signal block SSB ID, SSB group ID.
- the M first TCI states include at least one of the following: M1 joint TCI states, M2 independent downlink DL TCI states, and M3 independent uplink UL TCI states.
- the TCI status determining device 400 in the embodiment of the present application may be an electronic device, such as an electronic device with an operating system, or may be a component in the electronic device, such as an integrated circuit or chip.
- the electronic device may be a terminal or other devices other than the terminal.
- terminals may include but are not limited to the types of terminals 11 listed above, and other devices may be servers, network attached storage (Network Attached Storage, NAS), etc., which are not specifically limited in the embodiment of this application.
- the TCI status determination device 400 provided in this embodiment can implement each process in the method embodiment shown in Figure 2 and can achieve the same beneficial effects. To avoid duplication, the details will not be described again.
- the TCI status determination device 500 may include the following modules:
- the first sending module 501 is used to indicate common beam information to the terminal, where the common beam information includes M first TCI states, where M is a positive integer;
- the second determination module 502 is configured to determine the target TCI state of the target channel and/or the target signal from the M first TCI states;
- the target channel includes: at least one of the physical uplink control channel PUCCH, physical downlink control channel PDCCH, physical downlink shared channel PDSCH and physical uplink shared channel PUSCH; or the target signal includes: sounding reference signal SRS and at least one of channel state information reference signals CSI-RS.
- the second determination module 502 is specifically used to:
- the target TCI state of the target channel and/or the target signal is determined from the M first TCI states, wherein the target information includes at least one of the following:
- the first identification information being used to identify at least one of the target channel and/or the target signal
- the value of the first identification information corresponding to the target channel and/or target signal is the value of the first identification information corresponding to the target channel and/or target signal
- the type of target channel and/or target signal is the type of target channel and/or target signal
- the target channel and/or the transmission mode of the target signal are The target channel and/or the transmission mode of the target signal
- the time domain behavior of the target channel and/or target signal is the time domain behavior of the target channel and/or target signal
- First information or second information the first information indicates that the first downlink control information DCI schedules PUSCH or PDSCH, the second information indicates that the first DCI does not schedule PUSCH or PDSCH, and the first DCI is used to trigger The target signal or scheduling the target channel;
- the target indication field of the first DCI is used to indicate the M first At least one of the TCI states;
- the common beam information includes the N preset TCI states, N is a positive integer less than or equal to M;
- the first identification information includes at least one of the following:
- the frequency domain resource identification information of the target channel
- the layer identification information of the target channel is the layer identification information of the target channel.
- the corresponding relationship between the first TCI state and the first identification information includes at least one of the following:
- M is an integer greater than 2.
- the TCI status determination device 500 also includes:
- a fourth determination module configured to determine the N preset TCI states from the M first TCI states according to third information, wherein the third information is indicated by the network side device or agreed by the protocol;
- the second determination module 502 is specifically used to:
- the target TCI state of the target channel and/or the target signal is determined from the N preset TCI states.
- the target indication field indicates the TCI status of the PUSCH scheduled by the first DCI
- the M first TCI statuses include the first DCI TCI status of scheduled PUSCH
- the second determination module 502 is specifically used to:
- Determining the target TCI state of the target signal includes the TCI state indicated by the target indication field, and the target signal includes at least one of the following:
- the SRS resource set that the terminal needs to send is based on the correspondence between the SRS resource set identification information triggered by the first DCI and the first TCI state, and The TCI status indicated by the target indication field is determined;
- the SRS resources that the terminal needs to send are based on the corresponding relationship between the SRS resource identification information triggered by the first DCI and the first TCI state, and the The TCI status indicated by the target indication field of the first DCI is determined;
- the target indication field indicates the TCI status of the PUSCH scheduled by the first DCI
- the M first TCI statuses include the same as the second TCI status.
- the second TCI state includes the TCI state of the PUSCH scheduled by the first DCI;
- the second determination module 502 is specifically used to:
- Determining the target TCI state of the target signal includes a TCI state corresponding to the same code point as the second TCI state or the second TCI state, and the target signal includes at least one of the following:
- the CSI-RS resource set that the terminal needs to send is based on the CSI-RS resource set identification information triggered by the first DCI and the first TCI. Correspondence between states, and determination of the TCI state indicated by the target indication field;
- the CSI-RS resource group that the terminal needs to send is based on the CSI-RS resource group identification information triggered by the first DCI and the CSI-RS resource group that the terminal needs to send.
- the CSI-RS in the CSI-RS resources that the terminal needs to send are based on the combination of the CSI-RS resource identification information triggered by the first DCI and the first TCI state.
- the target indication field indicates the TCI status of the PDSCH scheduled by the first DCI
- the M first TCI statuses include the first DCI TCI status of scheduled PDSCH
- the second determination module 502 is specifically used to:
- Determining the target TCI state of the target signal includes the TCI state indicated by the target indication field, and the target signal includes at least one of the following:
- the CSI-RS resource set that the terminal needs to send is based on the CSI-RS resource set identification information triggered by the first DCI and the first TCI. Correspondence between states, and determination of the TCI state indicated by the target indication field;
- the CSI-RS resource group that the terminal needs to send is based on the CSI-RS resource group identification information triggered by the first DCI and the first Correspondence between TCI states, and determination of the TCI state indicated by the target indication field of the first DCI;
- the CSI-RS in the CSI-RS resources that the terminal needs to send are based on the combination of the CSI-RS resource identification information triggered by the first DCI and the first TCI state.
- the target indication field Indicates the TCI status of the PDSCH scheduled by the first DCI.
- the M first TCI status includes the TCI status corresponding to the same code point as the third TCI status and the third TCI status.
- the third TCI status includes the The TCI status of the PDSCH scheduled by the first DCI;
- the second determination module 502 is specifically used to:
- Determining the target TCI state of the target signal includes a TCI state corresponding to the same code point as the third TCI state or the third TCI state, and the target signal includes at least one of the following:
- the SRS resource set that the terminal needs to send is based on the correspondence between the SRS resource set identification information triggered by the first DCI and the first TCI state, and The TCI status indicated by the target indication field is determined;
- the SRS resources that the terminal needs to send are based on the corresponding relationship between the SRS resource identification information triggered by the first DCI and the first TCI state, and the The TCI status indicated by the target indication field of the first DCI is determined;
- m is the number of first TCI states suitable for the target channel and/or target signal included in the M first TCI states or the N preset TCI states
- K is the target channel. and/or the number of first identification information corresponding to the target signal
- the second determination module 502 is specifically used to:
- the target TCI state of the target channel and/or target signal includes the m first TCI states; and/or,
- m is greater than K
- the m first TCI states are determined as the TCI states of the target channels and/or target signals corresponding to the m pieces of first identification information, and the m first identification information is the Among the K pieces of first identification information, m pieces of first identification information are arranged in a preset position or indicated by the second indication information sent by the network side device to the terminal; and/or,
- Determining the target TCI state includes the m first TCI states and the original (K-m) TCI states of the target channel and/or target signal.
- the target signal includes SRS
- the periodic behavior of the SRS is aperiodic
- the second determination module 502 is specifically used to:
- the first DCI is used to trigger K SRS resource sets, the first DCI does not schedule PDSCH or PUSCH, and the target indication field of the first DCI indicates K first TCI states, then according to the K SRS resources
- the corresponding relationship between the set and the K first TCI states is determined to determine the TCI state of each SRS resource set in the K SRS resource sets, wherein the target TCI state includes the K first TCI states.
- K is a positive integer; and/or,
- the first DCI is used to trigger K SRS resource sets, the first DCI does not schedule PDSCH or PUSCH, and the target indication field of the first DCI indicates X first TCI states, then according to the K SRS resources
- the corresponding relationship between the set and the X first TCI states is to determine the TCI state of each SRS resource in the K SRS resource set, wherein the target channel and/or target signal includes the K SRS Resource set, the target TCI state includes the X first TCI states, where X represents the total number of SRS resources included in the K SRS resource set, and X is a positive integer.
- the second determination module 502 is specifically configured to:
- the first DCI is used to trigger K CSI-RS resource sets, the first DCI does not schedule PDSCH or PUSCH, and the target indication field of the first DCI indicates K first TCI states, then according to the K
- the corresponding relationship between the CSI-RS resource set and the K first TCI states determines the TCI state of each CSI-RS resource set in the K CSI-RS resource set, wherein the target TCI state includes The K first TCI states, K is a positive integer; and/or,
- the first DCI is used to trigger K CSI-RS resource sets, the first DCI does not schedule PDSCH or PUSCH, and the target indication field of the first DCI indicates X first TCI states, then the K CSI -The corresponding relationship between the RS resource set and the X first TCI states, determining the TCI state of each CSI-RS resource group in the K CSI-RS resource set, wherein the target TCI state includes all The X first TCI states, where X represents the total number of CSI-RS resource groups included in the K CSI-RS resource sets, and X is a positive integer; and/or,
- the first DCI is used to trigger K CSI-RS resource sets, the first DCI does not schedule PDSCH or PUSCH, and the target indication field of the first DCI indicates H first TCI states, then according to the K The corresponding relationship between the CSI-RS resource set and the H first TCI states determines the The TCI state of each CSI-RS resource in the K CSI-RS resource set, wherein the target TCI state includes the H first TCI states, where H represents the K CSI-RS resource set.
- the total number of CSI-RS resources in the included CSI-RS resource group, H is a positive integer.
- the second determination module 502 is specifically configured to:
- the target information determine the target TCI state of the preset CORESET or the preset CORESET group or the preset search space set corresponding to the PDCCH from the M first TCI states;
- the original TCI state of the preset CORESET, the preset CORESET group, or the preset search space set is associated with the second identifier
- the target TCI state of the preset CORESET, the preset CORESET group, or the preset search space set is associated with the third Three identifiers.
- the TCI status determining device 500 further includes:
- the second association module is used to switch the preset CORESET or the preset CORESET group or the preset search space set to be associated with the third identification; or,
- a third switching module configured to switch the preset CORESET or preset CORESET group or preset search space set to target resource transmission associated with the third identifier;
- the fourth switching module is used to determine that the terminal switches from the target resource associated with the second identity to the target resource associated with the third identity.
- the target resource includes at least one of the following:
- Cell identity Physical cell identity, bandwidth part BWP identity, sending and receiving point TRP identity, public TCI status pool identity, public TCI state type value, CORESET group identity, CORESET identity, channel group identity, CORESET pool identity, search space set identity, Search space ID, synchronization signal block SSB ID, SSB group ID.
- the target indication field of the first DCI indicates the first TCI status for the PDSCH or PUSCH and/or,
- the target indication field of the first DCI indicates a correspondence between at least two pieces of identification information of the PDSCH or PUSCH and at least two first TCI states.
- the corresponding relationship between at least two pieces of identification information of the PDSCH or PUSCH and at least two first TCI states includes at least one of the following:
- the fourth information includes: at least one of DMRS group, DMRS port, frequency domain resource and layer;
- the corresponding relationship between the arrangement order of the first TCI state and the first arrangement order, the first arrangement order includes at least one of the following:
- the parity order of the PDSCH or PUSCH layers is the parity order of the PDSCH or PUSCH layers.
- the second determination module 502 is specifically used to:
- the first preset TCI state is one of the original TCI states of the target channel and/or the target signal; or,
- the second determination module 502 includes:
- a third determination unit configured to determine that the target channel and/or target signal that the terminal needs to transmit includes the target channel and/or target signal associated with the first TCI state; or,
- a fourth determination unit configured to determine that the target channel and/or target signal that the terminal needs to transmit includes the target channel and/or target signal associated with the target resource corresponding to the first TCI state;
- the target resources include at least one of the following:
- Cell identity Physical cell identity, bandwidth part BWP identity, sending and receiving point TRP identity, public TCI status pool identity, public TCI state type value, CORESET group identity, CORESET identity, channel group identity, CORESET pool identity, search space set identity, Search space ID, synchronization signal block SSB ID, SSB group ID.
- the M first TCI states include at least one of the following: M1 joint TCI states, M2 independent downlink DL TCI states, and M3 independent uplink UL TCI states.
- the TCI status determination device 500 in the embodiment of the present application may be an electronic device, such as an electronic device with an operating system, or may be a component in the electronic device, such as an integrated circuit or chip.
- the electronic device may be a network-side device, or may be other devices besides the network-side device.
- network side devices may include but are not limited to the types of network side devices 12 listed above.
- Other devices may be servers, network attached storage (Network Attached Storage, NAS), etc., which are not specifically limited in the embodiment of this application.
- the TCI status determination device 500 provided in this embodiment can implement each process in the method embodiment shown in Figure 3, and can achieve the same beneficial effects. To avoid duplication, the details will not be described again.
- this embodiment of the present application also provides a communication device 600, which includes a processor 601 and a memory 602.
- the memory 602 stores programs or instructions that can be run on the processor 601, such as , when the communication device 600 is a terminal, when the program or instruction is executed by the processor 601, each step of the TCI state determination method embodiment shown in Figure 2 or Figure 3 is implemented, and the same technical effect can be achieved.
- the communication device 600 is a terminal, the program or instruction is executed by the processor 601 to implement the steps of the method embodiment shown in Figure 2; when the communication device 600 is a network-side device, the program or instruction is executed by the processor 601
- Each step of the method embodiment shown in Figure 3 can be implemented simultaneously, and the same technical effect can be achieved. To avoid repetition, the details will not be described here.
- An embodiment of the present application also provides a terminal, including a processor and a communication interface.
- the communication interface is used to obtain the common beam information indicated by the network side device, wherein the common beam information includes M first TCI states, M is A positive integer;
- the processor is configured to determine the target channel and/or the target TCI state of the target signal from the M first TCI states; wherein the target channel includes: physical uplink control channel PUCCH, physical downlink control channel At least one of PDCCH, physical downlink shared channel PDSCH and physical uplink shared channel PUSCH; or, the target signal includes: at least one of sounding reference signal SRS and channel state information reference signal CSI-RS.
- FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of a terminal that implements an embodiment of the present application.
- the terminal 700 includes but is not limited to: radio frequency unit 701, network module 702, audio output unit 703, at least some components of the input unit 704, the sensor 705, the display unit 706, the user input unit 707, the interface unit 708, the memory 709, the processor 710, and the like.
- the terminal 700 may also include a power supply (such as a battery) that supplies power to various components.
- the power supply may be logically connected to the processor 710 through a power management system, thereby managing charging, discharging, and power consumption through the power management system. Management and other functions.
- the terminal structure shown in FIG. 7 does not constitute a limitation on the terminal.
- the terminal may include more or fewer components than shown in the figure, or some components may be combined or arranged differently, which will not be described again here.
- the input unit 704 may include a graphics processing unit (Graphics Processing Unit, GPU) 7041 and a microphone 7042.
- the graphics processor 7041 is responsible for the image capture device (GPU) in the video capture mode or the image capture mode. Process the image data of still pictures or videos obtained by cameras (such as cameras).
- the display unit 706 may include a display panel 7061, which may be configured in the form of a liquid crystal display, an organic light emitting diode, or the like.
- the user input unit 707 includes a touch panel 7071 and at least one of other input devices 7072 .
- Touch panel 7071 also called touch screen.
- the touch panel 7071 may include two parts: a touch detection device and a touch controller.
- Other input devices 7072 may include but are not limited to physical keyboards, function keys (such as volume control keys, switch keys, etc.), trackballs, mice, and joysticks, which will not be described again here.
- the radio frequency unit 701 after receiving downlink data from the network side device, can transmit it to the processor 710 for processing; in addition, the radio frequency unit 701 can send uplink data to the network side device.
- the radio frequency unit 701 includes, but is not limited to, an antenna, amplifier, transceiver, coupler, low noise amplifier, duplexer, etc.
- Memory 709 may be used to store software programs or instructions as well as various data.
- the memory 709 may mainly include a first storage area for storing programs or instructions and a second storage area for storing data, wherein the first storage area may store an operating system, an application program or instructions required for at least one function (such as a sound playback function, Image playback function, etc.) etc.
- memory 709 may include volatile memory or non-volatile memory, or memory 709 may include both volatile and non-volatile memory.
- the non-volatile memory can be read-only memory (Read-Only Memory, ROM), programmable read-only memory (Programmable ROM, PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (Erasable PROM, EPROM), electrically removable memory. Erase programmable read-only memory (Electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
- Volatile memory can be random access memory (Random Access memory) Memory, RAM), static random access memory (Static RAM, SRAM), dynamic random access memory (Dynamic RAM, DRAM), synchronous dynamic random access memory (Synchronous DRAM, SDRAM), double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory Access memory (Double Data Rate SDRAM, DDRSDRAM), enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (Enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM), synchronous link dynamic random access memory (Synch link DRAM, SLDRAM) and direct memory bus random access memory (Direct Rambus RAM, DRRAM).
- Memory 709 in embodiments of the present application includes, but is not limited to, these and any other suitable types of memory.
- the processor 710 may include one or more processing units; optionally, the processor 710 integrates an application processor and a modem processor, where the application processor mainly handles operations related to the operating system, user interface, application programs, etc., Modem processors mainly process wireless communication signals, such as baseband processors. It can be understood that the above-mentioned modem processor may not be integrated into the processor 710.
- the radio frequency unit 701 is used to obtain the common beam information indicated by the network side device, where the common beam information includes M first TCI states, and M is a positive integer;
- Processor 710 configured to determine the target TCI state of the target channel and/or the target signal from the M first TCI states
- the target channel includes: at least one of the physical uplink control channel PUCCH, physical downlink control channel PDCCH, physical downlink shared channel PDSCH and physical uplink shared channel PUSCH; the target signal includes: sounding reference signal SRS and channel
- the status information refers to at least one item in the CSI-RS.
- the determination of the target TCI state of the target channel and/or the target signal from the M first TCI states performed by the processor 710 includes:
- the target TCI state of the target channel and/or the target signal is determined from the M first TCI states, wherein the target information includes at least one of the following:
- the first identification information being used to identify at least one of the target channel and/or the target signal
- the value of the first identification information corresponding to the target channel and/or target signal is the value of the first identification information corresponding to the target channel and/or target signal
- the type of target channel and/or target signal is the type of target channel and/or target signal
- the target channel and/or the transmission mode of the target signal are The target channel and/or the transmission mode of the target signal
- the time domain behavior of the target channel and/or target signal is the time domain behavior of the target channel and/or target signal
- First information or second information the first information indicates that the first downlink control information DCI schedules PUSCH or PDSCH, the second information indicates that the first DCI does not schedule PUSCH or PDSCH, and the first DCI is used to trigger The target signal or scheduling the target channel;
- the target indication field of the first DCI is used to indicate at least one of the M first TCI states
- the common beam information includes the N preset TCI states, N is a positive integer less than or equal to M;
- the first identification information includes at least one of the following:
- the frequency domain resource identification information of the target channel
- the layer identification information of the target channel is the layer identification information of the target channel.
- the corresponding relationship between the first TCI state and the first identification information includes at least one of the following:
- M is an integer greater than 2.
- the processor 710 is further configured to determine the N preset TCI states from the M first TCI states according to third information, wherein the third information is indicated by the network side device or by agreement;
- the step performed by the processor 710 to determine the target TCI state of the target channel and/or the target signal from the M first TCI states according to the target information includes:
- the target TCI state of the target channel and/or the target signal is determined from the N preset TCI states.
- the target indication field indicates the TCI status of the PUSCH scheduled by the first DCI
- the M first TCI statuses include the first DCI TCI status of scheduled PUSCH
- the step performed by the processor 710 to determine the target TCI state of the target channel and/or the target signal from the M first TCI states according to the target information includes:
- Determining the target TCI state of the target signal includes the TCI state indicated by the target indication field, and the target signal includes at least one of the following:
- the SRS resource set that the terminal needs to send is based on the correspondence between the SRS resource set identification information triggered by the first DCI and the first TCI state, and The TCI status indicated by the target indication field is determined;
- the SRS resources that the terminal needs to send are based on the corresponding relationship between the SRS resource identification information triggered by the first DCI and the first TCI state, and the The TCI status indicated by the target indication field of the first DCI is determined;
- the target indication field indicates the TCI status of the PUSCH scheduled by the first DCI
- the M first TCI statuses include the same as the second TCI status.
- the second TCI state includes the TCI state of the PUSCH scheduled by the first DCI;
- the step performed by the processor 710 to determine the target TCI state of the target channel and/or the target signal from the M first TCI states according to the target information includes:
- Determining the target TCI state of the target signal includes a TCI state corresponding to the same code point as the second TCI state or the second TCI state, wherein the target target signal includes at least one of the following:
- the CSI-RS resource set that the terminal needs to send is based on the CSI-RS resource set identification information triggered by the first DCI and the first TCI. Correspondence between states, and determination of the TCI state indicated by the target indication field;
- the CSI-RS resource group that the terminal needs to send is based on the CSI-RS resource group identification information triggered by the first DCI and the first Correspondence between TCI states, and determination of the TCI state indicated by the target indication field of the first DCI;
- the CSI-RS in the CSI-RS resources that the terminal needs to send are based on the combination of the CSI-RS resource identification information triggered by the first DCI and the first TCI state.
- the target indication field indicates the TCI status of the PDSCH scheduled by the first DCI
- the M first TCI statuses include the first DCI TCI status of scheduled PDSCH
- the step performed by the processor 710 to determine the target TCI state of the target channel and/or the target signal from the M first TCI states according to the target information includes:
- Determining the target TCI state of the target signal includes the TCI state indicated by the target indication field, and the target signal includes at least one of the following:
- the CSI-RS resource set that the terminal needs to send is based on the CSI-RS resource set identification information triggered by the first DCI and the first TCI. Correspondence between states, and determination of the TCI state indicated by the target indication field;
- the CSI-RS resource group that the terminal needs to send is based on the CSI-RS resource group identification information triggered by the first DCI and the first Correspondence between TCI states, and determination of the TCI state indicated by the target indication field of the first DCI;
- the CSI-RS in the CSI-RS resources that the terminal needs to send are based on the combination of the CSI-RS resource identification information triggered by the first DCI and the first TCI state.
- the target indication field indicates the TCI state of the PDSCH scheduled by the first DCI
- the M first TCI states include the same as the third TCI state.
- the third TCI state includes the TCI state of the PDSCH scheduled by the first DCI;
- the step performed by the processor 710 to determine the target TCI state of the target channel and/or the target signal from the M first TCI states according to the target information includes:
- Determining the target TCI state of the target signal includes a TCI state corresponding to the same code point as the third TCI state or the third TCI state, and the target signal includes at least one of the following:
- the SRS resource set that the terminal needs to send is based on the correspondence between the SRS resource set identification information triggered by the first DCI and the first TCI state, and The TCI status indicated by the target indication field is determined;
- the SRS resources that the terminal needs to send are based on the corresponding relationship between the SRS resource identification information triggered by the first DCI and the first TCI state, and the The TCI status indicated by the target indication field of the first DCI is determined;
- m is the number of first TCI states suitable for the target channel and/or target signal included in the M first TCI states or the N preset TCI states
- K is the target channel. and/or the number of first identification information corresponding to the target signal
- the processor 710 determines from the M first TCI states according to the target information.
- the target TCI status of the target channel and/or target signal including:
- the target TCI state of the target channel and/or target signal includes the m first TCI states; and/or,
- the K TCI states among the m first TCI states and located at preset positions or indicated by the first indication information from the network side device are determined as the target channel and /or the target TCI status of the target signal; and/or,
- the m first TCI states are determined as the TCI states of the target channels and/or target signals corresponding to the m pieces of first identification information, and the m first identification information is the m pieces of first identification information among the K pieces of first identification information and arranged in a preset position or indicated by the second indication information from the network side device; and/or,
- Determining the target TCI state includes the m first TCI states and the original (K-m) TCI states of the target channel and/or target signal.
- the processor 710 determines the target channel from the M first TCI states according to the target information. and/or the target TCI status of the target signal, including:
- the first DCI is used to trigger K SRS resource sets, the first DCI does not schedule PDSCH or PUSCH, and the target indication field of the first DCI indicates K first TCI states, then according to the K SRS resources
- the corresponding relationship between the set and the K first TCI states is determined to determine the TCI state of each SRS resource set in the K SRS resource sets, wherein the target TCI state includes the K first TCI states.
- K is a positive integer; and/or,
- the first DCI is used to trigger K SRS resource sets, the first DCI does not schedule PDSCH or PUSCH, and the target indication field of the first DCI indicates X first TCI states, then according to the K SRS resources
- the corresponding relationship between the set and the X first TCI states is to determine the TCI state of each SRS resource in the K SRS resource set, wherein the target channel and/or target signal includes the K SRS Resource set, the target TCI state includes the X first TCI states, where X represents the total number of SRS resources included in the K SRS resource set, and X is a positive integer.
- the processor 710 performs the step of selecting from the M first signals according to the target information.
- the target TCI status of the target channel and/or target signal is determined in the TCI status, including:
- the first DCI is used to trigger K CSI-RS resource sets, the first DCI does not schedule PDSCH or PUSCH, and the target indication field of the first DCI indicates K first TCI states, then according to the K
- the corresponding relationship between the CSI-RS resource set and the K first TCI states determines the TCI state of each CSI-RS resource set in the K CSI-RS resource set, wherein the target TCI state includes The K first TCI states, K is a positive integer; and/or,
- the first DCI is used to trigger K CSI-RS resource sets, the first DCI does not schedule PDSCH or PUSCH, and the target indication field of the first DCI indicates X first TCI states, then according to the K
- the corresponding relationship between the CSI-RS resource set and the X first TCI states determines the TCI state of each CSI-RS resource group in the K CSI-RS resource set, where the target TCI state includes The X first TCI states, where X represents the total number of CSI-RS resource groups included in the K CSI-RS resource sets, and X is a positive integer; and/or,
- the first DCI is used to trigger K CSI-RS resource sets, the first DCI does not schedule PDSCH or PUSCH, and the target indication field of the first DCI indicates H first TCI states, then according to the K
- the corresponding relationship between the CSI-RS resource set and the H first TCI states determines the TCI state of each CSI-RS resource in the K CSI-RS resource set, wherein the target TCI state includes all The H first TCI states, where H represents the total number of CSI-RS resources in the CSI-RS resource group included in the K CSI-RS resource sets, and H is a positive integer.
- the processor 710 determines the target TCI state of the target channel and/or the target signal from the M first TCI states according to the target information, including: :
- the target information determine the target TCI state of the preset CORESET or the preset CORESET group or the preset search space set corresponding to the PDCCH from the M first TCI states;
- the original TCI state of the preset CORESET, the preset CORESET group, or the preset search space set is associated with the second identifier
- the target TCI state of the preset CORESET, the preset CORESET group, or the preset search space set is associated with the third Three identifiers.
- the processor 710 is also used to:
- the target resource associated with the second identification is switched to the target resource associated with the third identification.
- the target resource includes at least one of the following:
- Cell identification Physical cell identification, bandwidth part BWP identification, sending and receiving point TRP identification, public TCI status pool identification, public TCI status type value, CORESET group identification, CORESET identification, channel group identification, CORESET pool identification, search space set identification, Search space ID, synchronization signal block SSB ID, SSB group ID.
- the target indication field of the first DCI indicates the first TCI status for the PDSCH or PUSCH and/or,
- the target indication field of the first DCI indicates a correspondence between at least two pieces of identification information of the PDSCH or PUSCH and at least two first TCI states.
- the corresponding relationship between at least two pieces of identification information of the PDSCH or PUSCH and at least two first TCI states includes at least one of the following:
- the fourth information includes: at least one of DMRS group, DMRS port, frequency domain resource and layer;
- the corresponding relationship between the arrangement order of the first TCI state and the first arrangement order, the first arrangement order includes at least one of the following:
- the parity order of the PDSCH or PUSCH layers is the parity order of the PDSCH or PUSCH layers.
- the determination of the target TCI state of the target channel and/or the target signal from the M first TCI states performed by the processor 710 includes:
- the first preset TCI state in the state is the target TCI state of the target channel and/or target signal
- the first preset TCI state is the original TCI state of the target channel and/or target signal.
- the determination performed by the processor 710 to perform single beam or single TRP transmission on the target channel and/or the target signal based on the 1 first TCI state includes:
- the target channel and/or target signal that needs to be transmitted include the target channel and/or target signal associated with the first TCI state; or,
- the target channel and/or target signal that needs to be transmitted includes the target channel and/or target signal associated with the target resource corresponding to the first TCI state;
- the target resources include at least one of the following:
- Cell identity Physical cell identity, bandwidth part BWP identity, sending and receiving point TRP identity, public TCI status pool identity, public TCI state type value, CORESET group identity, CORESET identity, channel group identity, CORESET pool identity, search space set identity, Search space ID, synchronization signal block SSB ID, SSB group ID.
- the M first TCI states include at least one of the following: M1 joint TCI states, M2 independent downlink DL TCI states, and M3 independent uplink UL TCI states.
- the above-mentioned terminal 700 can implement the process of implementing each model in the TCI determination device 400 as shown in Figure 4, and can achieve the same technical effect. To avoid duplication, the details will not be described again.
- An embodiment of the present application also provides a network side device including a processor and a communication interface.
- the communication interface is used to indicate common beam information to the terminal, wherein the common beam information includes M first TCI states, and M is a positive integer.
- the processor is configured to determine the target channel and/or the target TCI state of the target signal from the M first TCI states; wherein the target channel includes: physical uplink control channel PUCCH, physical downlink control channel PDCCH, At least one of the physical downlink shared channel PDSCH and the physical uplink shared channel PUSCH; or, the target signal includes: at least one of the sounding reference signal SRS and the channel state information reference signal CSI-RS.
- This network-side device embodiment corresponds to the above-mentioned network-side device method embodiment, and the above-mentioned method implements Each implementation process and implementation method of the example can be applied to the network side device embodiment, and can achieve the same technical effect.
- the embodiment of the present application also provides a network side device.
- the network side device 800 includes: an antenna 801 , a radio frequency device 802 , a baseband device 803 , a processor 804 and a memory 805 .
- Antenna 801 is connected to radio frequency device 802.
- the radio frequency device 802 receives information through the antenna 801 and sends the received information to the baseband device 803 for processing.
- the baseband device 803 processes the information to be sent and sends it to the radio frequency device 802.
- the radio frequency device 802 processes the received information and then sends it out through the antenna 801.
- the method performed by the network side device in the above embodiment can be implemented in the baseband device 803, which includes a baseband processor.
- the baseband device 803 may include, for example, at least one baseband board on which multiple chips are disposed, as shown in FIG. Program to perform the network device operations shown in the above method embodiments.
- the network side device may also include a network interface 806, which is, for example, a common public radio interface (CPRI).
- a network interface 806, which is, for example, a common public radio interface (CPRI).
- CPRI common public radio interface
- the network side device 800 in this embodiment of the present invention also includes: instructions or programs stored in the memory 805 and executable on the processor 804.
- the processor 804 calls the instructions or programs in the memory 805 to execute each of the steps shown in Figure 5. The method of module execution and achieving the same technical effect will not be described in detail here to avoid duplication.
- Embodiments of the present application also provide a readable storage medium on which a program or instructions are stored.
- the program or instructions are executed by a processor, the embodiment of the TCI state determination method is implemented as shown in Figure 2 or Figure 3.
- Each process can achieve the same technical effect. To avoid repetition, we will not go into details here.
- the processor is the processor in the terminal described in the above embodiment.
- the readable storage medium includes computer readable storage media, such as computer read-only memory ROM, random access memory RAM, magnetic disk or optical disk, etc.
- An embodiment of the present application further provides a chip.
- the chip includes a processor and a communication interface.
- the communication interface is coupled to the processor.
- the processor is used to run programs or instructions.
- the implementation is as shown in the figure 2 or the various processes of the TCI status determination method embodiment shown in Figure 3, and can achieve the same technical effect, so to avoid repetition, they will not be described again here.
- chips mentioned in the embodiments of this application may also be called system-on-chip, system-on-a-chip, system-on-chip or system-on-chip, etc.
- Embodiments of the present application further provide a computer program/program product, the computer program/program product is stored in a storage medium, and the computer program/program product is executed by at least one processor to implement Figure 2 or Figure 3
- the computer program/program product is executed by at least one processor to implement Figure 2 or Figure 3
- Embodiments of the present application also provide a wireless communication system, including: a terminal and a network side device.
- the terminal can be used to perform the steps of the TCI status determination method as shown in Figure 2.
- the network side device can be used to perform the steps of the TCI status determination method as shown in Figure 3. Shown are the steps of the TCI status determination method.
- the methods of the above embodiments can be implemented by means of software plus the necessary general hardware platform. Of course, it can also be implemented by hardware, but in many cases the former is better. implementation.
- the technical solution of the present application can be embodied in the form of a computer software product that is essentially or contributes to the existing technology.
- the computer software product is stored in a storage medium (such as ROM/RAM, disk , CD), including several instructions to cause a terminal (which can be a mobile phone, computer, server, air conditioner, or network device, etc.) to execute the methods described in various embodiments of this application.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Signal Processing (AREA)
- Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
- Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
Abstract
本申请公开了一种TCI状态确定方法、装置、终端和网络侧设备,属于通信技术领域,本申请实施例的TCI状态确定方法包括:终端获取网络侧设备指示的公共波束信息,其中,所述公共波束信息包括M个第一TCI状态,M为正整数;所述终端从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态;其中,所述目标信道,包括:物理上行控制信道PUCCH、物理下行控制信道PDCCH、物理下行共享信道PDSCH和物理上行共享信道PUSCH中的至少一项;或者,所述目标信号包括:探测参考信号SRS和信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS中的至少一项。
Description
相关申请的交叉引用
本申请主张在2022年07月18日在中国提交的中国专利申请No.202210845953.2的优先权,其全部内容通过引用包含于此。
本申请属于通信技术领域,具体涉及一种TCI状态确定方法、装置、终端和网络侧设备。
在多发送接收点(Multi Transmission Reception Point,mTRP)场景中,网络侧设备需要为每一个信道使用该信道对应的波束指示方案来指示其传输配置指示(Transmission Configuration Indicator,TCI)状态(state),以使终端使用网络侧设备指示的TCI状态确定使用哪个波束来传输,因此各信道的波束指示过程比较复杂。
发明内容
本申请实施例提供一种TCI状态确定方法、装置、终端和网络侧设备,能够简化信道和/或信号的波束指示过程。
第一方面,提供了一种TCI状态确定方法,该方法包括:
终端获取网络侧设备指示的公共波束信息,其中,所述公共波束信息包括M个第一TCI状态,M为正整数;
所述终端从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态;
其中,所述目标信道,包括:物理上行控制信道PUCCH、物理下行控制信道PDCCH、物理下行共享信道PDSCH和物理上行共享信道PUSCH中的至少一项;或者,所述目标信号包括:探测参考信号SRS和信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS中的至少一项。
第二方面,提供了一种TCI状态确定装置,应用于终端,该装置包括:
获取模块,用于获取网络侧设备指示的公共波束信息,其中,所述公共波束信息包括M个第一TCI状态,M为正整数;
第一确定模块,用于从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态;
其中,所述目标信道,包括:物理上行控制信道PUCCH、物理下行控制信道PDCCH、物理下行共享信道PDSCH和物理上行共享信道PUSCH中的至少一项;或者,所述目标信号包括:探测参考信号SRS和信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS中的至少一项。
第三方面,提供了一种TCI状态确定方法,该方法包括:
网络侧设备向终端指示公共波束信息,其中,所述公共波束信息包括M个第一TCI状态,M为正整数;
所述网络侧设备从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态;
其中,所述目标信道,包括:物理上行控制信道PUCCH、物理下行控制信道PDCCH、物理下行共享信道PDSCH和物理上行共享信道PUSCH中的至少一项;或者,所述目标信号包括:探测参考信号SRS和信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS中的至少一项。
第四方面,提供了一种TCI状态确定装置,应用于网络侧设备,该装置包括:
第一发送模块,用于向终端指示公共波束信息,其中,所述公共波束信息包括M个第一TCI状态,M为正整数;
第二确定模块,用于从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态;
其中,所述目标信道,包括:物理上行控制信道PUCCH、物理下行控制信道PDCCH、物理下行共享信道PDSCH和物理上行共享信道PUSCH中的至少一项;或者,所述目标信号包括:探测参考信号SRS和信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS中的至少一项。
第五方面,提供了一种终端,该终端包括处理器和存储器,所述存储器
存储可在所述处理器上运行的程序或指令,所述程序或指令被所述处理器执行时实现如第一方面所述的方法的步骤。
第六方面,提供了一种终端,包括处理器及通信接口,其中,所述通信接口用于获取网络侧设备指示的公共波束信息,其中,所述公共波束信息包括M个第一TCI状态,M为正整数;所述处理器用于从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态;其中,所述目标信道,包括:物理上行控制信道PUCCH、物理下行控制信道PDCCH、物理下行共享信道PDSCH和物理上行共享信道PUSCH中的至少一项;或者,所述目标信号包括:探测参考信号SRS和信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS中的至少一项。
第七方面,提供了一种网络侧设备,该网络侧设备包括处理器和存储器,所述存储器存储可在所述处理器上运行的程序或指令,所述程序或指令被所述处理器执行时实现如第三方面所述的方法的步骤。
第八方面,提供了一种网络侧设备,包括处理器及通信接口,其中,所述通信接口用于向终端指示公共波束信息,其中,所述公共波束信息包括M个第一TCI状态,M为正整数;所述处理器用于从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态;其中,所述目标信道,包括:物理上行控制信道PUCCH、物理下行控制信道PDCCH、物理下行共享信道PDSCH和物理上行共享信道PUSCH中的至少一项;或者,所述目标信号包括:探测参考信号SRS和信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS中的至少一项。
第九方面,提供了一种无线通信***,包括:终端及网络侧设备,所述终端可用于执行如第一方面所述的TCI状态确定方法的步骤,所述网络侧设备可用于执行如第三方面所述的TCI状态确定方法的步骤。
第十方面,提供了一种可读存储介质,所述可读存储介质上存储程序或指令,所述程序或指令被处理器执行时实现如第一方面所述的方法的步骤,或者实现如第三方面所述的方法的步骤。
第十一方面,提供了一种芯片,所述芯片包括处理器和通信接口,所述通信接口和所述处理器耦合,所述处理器用于运行程序或指令,实现如第一方面所述的方法,或实现如第三方面所述的方法。
第十二方面,提供了一种计算机程序/程序产品,所述计算机程序/程序产品被存储在存储介质中,所述计算机程序/程序产品被至少一个处理器执行以实现如第一方面所述的TCI状态确定方法的步骤,或者以实现如第三方面所述的TCI状态确定方法的步骤。
在本申请实施例中,终端获取网络侧设备指示的公共波束信息,其中,所述公共波束信息包括M个第一TCI状态,M为正整数;所述终端从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态;其中,所述目标信道,包括:物理上行控制信道PUCCH、物理下行控制信道PDCCH、物理下行共享信道PDSCH和物理上行共享信道PUSCH中的至少一项;或者,所述目标信号包括:探测参考信号SRS和信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS中的至少一项。这样,PUCCH、PDCCH、PDSCH、PUSCH、SRS和CSI-RS能够共用网络侧设备指示的M个第一TCI状态,通过为不同的信道和/或信号指示共用的TCI状态,降低了波束指示的复杂程度。
图1是本申请实施例能够应用的一种无线通信***的结构示意图;
图2是本申请实施例提供的一种TCI状态确定方法的流程图;
图3是本申请实施例提供的另一种TCI状态确定方法的流程图;
图4是本申请实施例提供的一种TCI状态确定装置的结构示意图;
图5是本申请实施例提供的另一种TCI状态确定装置的结构示意图;
图6是本申请实施例提供的一种通信设备的结构示意图;
图7是本申请实施例提供的一种终端的硬件结构示意图;
图8是本申请实施例提供的一种网络侧设备的结构示意图。
下面将结合本申请实施例中的附图,对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行清楚描述,显然,所描述的实施例是本申请一部分实施例,而不是全部的实施例。基于本申请中的实施例,本领域普通技术人员所获得的所有其他实施例,都属于本申请保护的范围。
本申请的说明书和权利要求书中的术语“第一”、“第二”等是用于区别类似的对象,而不用于描述特定的顺序或先后次序。应该理解这样使用的术语在适当情况下可以互换,以便本申请的实施例能够以除了在这里图示或描述的那些以外的顺序实施,且“第一”、“第二”所区别的对象通常为一类,并不限定对象的个数,例如第一对象可以是一个,也可以是多个。此外,说明书以及权利要求中“和/或”表示所连接对象的至少其中之一,字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。
值得指出的是,本申请实施例所描述的技术不限于长期演进型(Long Term Evolution,LTE)/LTE的演进(LTE-Advanced,LTE-A)***,还可用于其他无线通信***,诸如码分多址(Code Division Multiple Access,CDMA)、时分多址(Time Division Multiple Access,TDMA)、频分多址(Frequency Division Multiple Access,FDMA)、正交频分多址(Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access,OFDMA)、单载波频分多址(Single-carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access,SC-FDMA)和其他***。本申请实施例中的术语“***”和“网络”常被可互换地使用,所描述的技术既可用于以上提及的***和无线电技术,也可用于其他***和无线电技术。以下描述出于示例目的描述了新空口(New Radio,NR)***,并且在以下大部分描述中使用NR术语,但是这些技术也可应用于NR***应用以外的应用,如第6代(6th Generation,6G)通信***。
图1示出本申请实施例可应用的一种无线通信***的框图。无线通信***包括终端11和网络侧设备12。其中,终端11可以是手机、平板电脑(Tablet Personal Computer)、膝上型电脑(Laptop Computer)或称为笔记本电脑、个人数字助理(Personal Digital Assistant,PDA)、掌上电脑、上网本、超级移动个人计算机(ultra-mobile personal computer,UMPC)、移动上网装置(Mobile Internet Device,MID)、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)/虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)设备、机器人、可穿戴式设备(Wearable Device)、车载设备(Vehicle User Equipment,VUE)、行人终端(Pedestrian User Equipment,PUE)、智能家居(具有无线通信功能的家居设备,如冰箱、电视、洗衣机或者家具等)、游戏机、个人计算机(personal computer,PC)、柜员机或者自助机等终端侧
设备,可穿戴式设备包括:智能手表、智能手环、智能耳机、智能眼镜、智能首饰(智能手镯、智能手链、智能戒指、智能项链、智能脚镯、智能脚链等)、智能腕带、智能服装等。需要说明的是,在本申请实施例并不限定终端11的具体类型。网络侧设备12可以包括接入网设备或核心网设备,其中,接入网设备也可以称为无线接入网设备、无线接入网(Radio Access Network,RAN)、无线接入网功能或无线接入网单元。接入网设备12可以包括基站、无线局域网(Wireless Local Area Network,WLAN)接入点或无线保真(Wireless Fidelity,WiFi)节点等,基站可被称为节点B、演进节点B(Evolved Node B,eNB)、接入点、基收发机站(Base Transceiver Station,BTS)、无线电基站、无线电收发机、基本服务集(Basic Service Set,BSS)、扩展服务集(Extended Service Set,ESS)、家用B节点、家用演进型B节点、发送接收点(Transmitting Receiving Point,TRP)或所述领域中其他某个合适的术语,只要达到相同的技术效果,所述基站不限于特定技术词汇,需要说明的是,在本申请实施例中仅以NR***中的基站为例进行介绍,并不限定基站的具体类型。
在无线通信中,在经过波束测量和波束报告后,网络侧设备可以对下行与上行链路的信道或参考信号做波束指示,用于网络侧设备与用户设备(User Equipment,UE)(例如终端),之间建立波束链路,实现信道或参考信号的传输。
需要说明的是,本申请实施例中的波束信息,可以包括以下至少一项:
波束的标识信息、空间关系(spatial relation)信息、空域发送滤波器(spatial domain transmission filter)信息、空域接收滤波器(spatial domain reception filter)信息、空域滤波器(spatial filter)信息、传输配置指示状态(TCI状态)信息、准共址(Quasi-colocation,QCL)信息、QCL参数。其中,下行波束信息通常可使用TCI状态信息或QCL信息表示。上行波束信息通常可使用TCI状态信息或spatial relation信息表示。
在相关技术中,每一种信道或参考信号具有各自的波束指示机制:
1)对于物理下行控制信道(Physical Downlink Control Channel,PDCCH)的波束指示:网络侧设备使用无线资源控制(Radio Resource Control,RRC)
信令为每个控制资源集(Control resource set,CORESET)配置K个TCI状态,当K>1时,由媒体接入控制(Medium Access Control,MAC)控制单元(Control Element,CE)指示或激活1个TCI状态,当K=1时,不需要额外的MAC CE信令。UE在监听PDCCH时,对CORESET内全部搜索空间(Search Space,SS)使用相同QCL,即相同的TCI状态来监听PDCCH。该TCI状态中的参考信号(reference Signal),例如:周期信道状态信息参考信号(Channel State Information Reference Signal,CSI-RS)资源(resource)、半持续CSI-RS resource、同步信号块(Synchronization Signal Block,SSB)等)与UE专用(UE-specific)PDCCH的解调参考信号(Demodulation Reference Signal,DMRS)端口是空间QCL的。UE根据该TCI状态即可获知使用哪个接收波束来接收PDCCH。
2)对于物理下行共享信道(Physical Downlink Shared Channel,PDSCH)的波束指示:网络侧设备通过RRC信令配置M个TCI状态,再使用MAC CE信令激活对应最多8个码点(codepoint)的TCI状态,然后通过下行控制信息(Downlink Control Information,DCI)的3-bit TCI域(field)来通知TCI状态,该TCI状态中的referenceSignal与要调度的PDSCH的DMRS端口是QCL的。UE根据该TCI状态即可获知使用哪个接收波束来接收PDSCH。
3)对于CSI-RS的波束指示:当CSI-RS类型为周期CSI-RS时,网络侧设备通过RRC信令为CSI-RS resource配置QCL信息。当CSI-RS类型为半持续CSI-RS时,网络侧设备通过MAC CE信令来从RRC配置的CSI-RS resource set中激活一个CSI-RS resource时指示其QCL信息。当CSI-RS类型为非周期CSI-RS时,网络侧设备通过RRC信令为CSI-RS resource配置QCL,并使用DCI来触发CSI-RS。
4)对于物理上行控制信道(Physical Uplink Control Channel,PUCCH)的波束指示:网络侧设备使用RRC信令通过参数“PUCCH空间关系信息(PUCCH-SpatialRelationInfo)”为每个PUCCH resource配置空间关系信息(spatial relation information),当为PUCCH resource配置的spatial relation information包含多个时,使用MAC CE指示或激活其中一个spatial relation information。当为PUCCH resource配置的spatial relation information只包含1
个时,不需要额外的MAC CE信令。
5)对于物理上行共享信道(Physical Uplink Shared Channel,PUSCH)的波束指示:PUSCH的spatial relation信息是当PDCCH承载的DCI调度PUSCH时,DCI中的探测参考信号(Sounding Reference Signal,SRS)资源指示(SRS resource indicator,SRI)field的每个SRI codepoint指示一个SRI,该SRI用于指示PUSCH的spatial relation information。
6)对于SRS的波束指示:当SRS类型为周期SRS时,网络侧设备通过RRC信令为SRS resource配置spatial relation information。当SRS类型为半持续SRS时,网络侧设备通过MAC CE信令激活spatial relation information。当SRS类型为非周期SRS时,网络侧设备通过RRC信令为SRS resource配置spatial relation information,并且可以通过MAC CE信令来更新。
由上可知,相关技术中,基于不同类型的信道或参考信号需要通过与该信道或参考信号对应的波束指示流程来指示其使用的目标TCI状态,由此可见,该波束指示的流程较为复杂。
为了简化波束指示流程,在5G NR的第三代合作伙伴计划(3rd Generation Partnership Project,3GPP)的公开版本(Release)17中引入了新的TCI框架(framework),该框架可称之为统一TCI框架(unified TCI framework),即网络侧设备使用MAC CE和/或DCI指示的同一个波束(beam)可以用于多个信道的传输,这种beam也可称为公共波束(common beam)。
该unified TCI framework的波束指示流程如下:
网络侧设备通过RRC信令配置TCI状态池(pool),并使用MAC CE信令激活该TCI状态pool中的1个或多个TCI状态。当MAC CE激活了与1个codepoint对应的TCI状态时,则激活的TCI状态直接应用于目标信号。当MAC CE激活了与多个codepoint分别对应的TCI状态时,网络侧设备再使用DCI中的TCI field来指示一个codepoint,该1个codepoint对应的TCI状态应用于目标信号。
其中,在unified TCI framework中的TCI状态可以包括联合(joint)TCI状态和独立(separate)TCI状态两种模式,该模式是由网络侧设备的RRC信令来配置的。其中,对于joint TCI状态,每个codepoint对应1个TCI状态;
对于separate TCI状态,每个codepoint可以对应一个1个下行链路(Down Link,DL)TCI状态和1个上行链路(Up Link,UL)TCI状态、或1个DL TCI状态、或1个UL TCI状态。
对于TCI状态的源(source)RS,可以分为以下两种情况:
1)DL:用于波束管理的CSI-RS(CSI-RS for beam management),用于跟踪的CSI-RS(CSI-RS for tracking);
2)UL:SSB,CSI-RS for beam management,CSI-RS for tracking,用于波束管理的SRS(SRS for beam management)。
对于TCI状态的目标信号,可以分为以下两种情况:
1)DL:PDSCH上的UE专用接收(UE-dedicated reception on PDSCH)、所有CORESET或CORESET子集上的UE专用接收(UE-dedicated reception on all or subset of CORESETs)、用于CSI的非周期CSI-RS资源(Aperiodic CSI-RS resources for CSI)、用于波束管理(Beam Management,BM)的非周期CSI-RS资源(Aperiodic CSI-RS resources for BM)、与CORESET上的非UE专用接收相关联的DMRS以及相关联的PDSCH(与服务小区物理小区标识(Physical Cell Identifier,PCI)相关联)(DMRS(s)associated with non-UE-dedicated reception on CORESET(s)and the associated PDSCH(associated with the serving cell PCI));
2)UL:基于动态授权/配置授权的PUSCH(dynamic-grant/configured-grant based PUSCH)、所有专用PUCCH资源(all of dedicated PUCCH resources)、BM的非周期SRS资源或资源集(Aperiodic SRS resources or resource sets for BM)、天线切换的SRS(SRS for antenna switching)、码本的SRS(SRS for codebook)、非码本的SRS(SRS for non-codebook)。
在实施中,在网络侧设备使用DCI进行波束指示时,支持具有DL分配的DCI格式(formats)1_1/1_2和不具有DL分配的DCI format 1_1/1_2。
波束指示(Beam indication)DCI指示的TCI状态的生效时间(beam application time),定义为:应用所指示的TCI状态的第一个时隙至少是联合或独立DL/UL波束指示的确认信息的最后一个符号之后的第Y个符号(the first slot to apply the indicated TCI is at least Y symbols after the last symbol of
the acknowledgment of the joint or separate DL/UL beam indication)后的第一个时隙。
功控参数中的路径损耗(pathloss RS,PLRS),是由网络侧设备配置在TCI状态内或者与TCI状态关联的。
功控参数中的其它参数(例如:P0、阿尔法(alpha)和闭环索引(close loop index)等参数配置),是由网络侧设备配置关联到TCI状态。对于PUCCH、PUSCH、SRS,都会有各自的参数配置(setting)与TCI状态关联、或包含在各信道的配置信息中。
对于载波聚合(Carrier Aggregation,CA)场景,网络为成员载波(Component Carrier,CC)列表中的全部CC上的目标信号指示公共QCL信息(common QCL information)和/或公共UL TX空间滤波器(common UL TX spatial filter(s)across a set of configured CC)。
需要说明的是,虽然如上3GPP R17中提出了unified TCI framework,但是,其仅适用于单TRP(single-TRP,sTRP)场景,而对于3GPP R16中引入的多TRP(multi-TRP,mTRP)传输并不适用。也就是说,目前没有在mTRP场景中对各信道应用unified TCI framework的方案,尤其是当mTRP场景中使用了相干联合传输(Coherent Joint Transmission,CJT)传输模式时,网络侧设备指示的unified TCI状态(state)(即unified TCI framework中对应公共波束的TCI state,本申请实施例中也将unified TCI state称之为公共TCI状态)的数量可以达到4个,相关技术中没有提出如何从网络侧设备指示的unified TCI state中确定各信道或参考信号的波束信息的方案。
而本申请实施例,正是提出一种可以在mTRP场景中对信道和/或参考信号应用unified TCI framework时,如何从网络侧设备指示的unified TCI state(即第一TCI状态)中确定各信道或参考信号的波束信息的方案。
下面结合附图,通过一些实施例及其应用场景对本申请实施例提供的TCI状态确定方法、TCI状态确定装置、终端和网络侧设备进行详细地说明。
请参阅图2,本申请实施例提供的一种TCI状态确定方法,其执行主体可以是终端,该终端可以是如图1中列举的各种终端11或者其他类型的终端,在此不作具体限定。如图2所示,该TCI状态确定方法可以包括以下步骤:
步骤201、终端获取网络侧设备指示的公共波束信息,其中,所述公共波束信息包括M个第一TCI状态,M为正整数。
其中,上述第一TCI状态可以理解为可供mTRP场景中的各信道和参考信号共享的激活的或指示的TCI状态,例如:网络侧设备通过RRC信令配置TCI状态pool,并使用MAC CE信令激活1个或至少两个codepoint对应的TCI状态,当激活的TCI状态对应的codepoint数量大于1时,网络侧设备再使用DCI中的TCI field来指示激活的至少部分TCI状态作为第一TCI状态。
其中,多TRP场景可以理解为一个网络侧设备可以具有至少两个TRP,且不同的TRP可以包括相同和/或不同的波束。在传输过程中,网络侧设备可以经由该至少两个TRP中的一个或多个与终端通信。
多TRP传输又可以基于控制信令分为单DCI调度(sDCI)和多DCI(mDCI)调度两种情况:
1、多DCI(multi-DCI,mDCI)调度:每个TRP发送各自的PDCCH,每个PDCCH调度各自的PDSCH,此时为UE配置的多个CORESET关联到不同的RRC参数控制资源集池索引(CORESETPoolIndex),以利用CORESETPoolIndex来对应不同的TRP。此时,两个TRP调度的PDSCH可以完全重叠、部分重叠或不重叠,且两个TRP调度各自的PUSCH不能重叠。
2、单DCI(single DCI,sDCI)调度:由一个TRP发送PDCCH调度一个PDSCH,此时为UE配置的多个CORESET不能关联到不同的CORESETPoolIndex。在这种情况下,MAC CE激活最多8个码点(codepoint),其中至少一个码点对应两个TCI状态。当一个DCI中TCI field指示的codepoint对应两个TCI状态且指示有一个TCI状态包含“QCL-TypeD”时,意味着调度PDSCH来自两个TRP,该PDSCH包括多种传输方案,如:PDSCH的不同层的数据对应两个TCI状态(方案1a,空分复用(Space Division Multiplexing,SDM));或者不同频域子载波上的数据对应两个TCI状态(方案2a/2b,频分复用(Frequency Division Multiplex,FDM));或者各次时域重复来自不同TRP(方案3/4,时分复用(Time Division Multiplexing,TDM))。
相关技术中的3GPP R17支持mTRP场景中的PDCCH重复(repetition)传输方案,且该方案只能应用在sDCI调度中。
具体的,通过RRC信令显式配置PDCCH所在的两个搜索空间集(search space set,SS set)相互关联。其中,两个SS set不限制是关联到同一个或不同的CORESET。不限制两个SS set所关联的CORESET的TCI state是否相同或不同。UE不期望第三个监听的SS set关联到上述两个相互关联的SS set中任意一个。两个相互关联的SS set具有相同的周期、起始位置(offset)、持续时间(duration)、监测时机(monitoring occasion)数量、聚合级别(Aggregation Level,AL)等。一个SS set的第n个monitoring occasion关联另一个SS set的第n个monitoring occasion,两个候选PDCCH具有相同的候选标识(candidate index)。不支持时隙间(inter-slot)的PDCCH repetition。上述SS set仅可以是终端专用搜索空间(UE-specific Search Space,USS)和Type3公共搜索空间(Common Search Space,CSS)。RRC参数恢复搜索空间Id(recoverySearchSpaceId)所配置的SS set不与其它SS set相关联。
相关技术中的3GPP R17支持了mTRP场景中一个DCI动态调度TDM方式的PUSCH repetition传输方案。
具体的,对于每个PUSCH重复分别使用对应不同TRP的多个发送波束(spatial relation)进行发送,以提高PUSCH传输的可靠性。对于Type A(slot-level)的PUSCH重复来说,一次PUSCH重复是指每个时隙内的一个PUSCH传输时机;对于Type B的PUSCH重复,一次PUSCH重复则为名义重复(nominal repetition)。DCI中可以指示两套波束(spatial relation)、预编码矩阵(Transmitted Precoding Matrix Indicator,TPMI)、功控参数等,并且在DCI中增加一个2bit的新指示域以支持在单TRP(single TRP,sTRP)和mTRP之间动态切换,以及灵活交换PUSCH重复发送波束的先后顺序。各次PUSCH重复与波束的映射关系可由RRC参数配置为轮流映射(cyclic mapping)和连续映射(sequential mapping)。
相关技术中的3GPP R17支持了多TRP场景中的PUCCH repetition的传输方案。
具体的,网络给PUCCH资源或PUCCH group激活两个波束的空间关系(spatial relation),则该PUCCH各次重复采用两个波束发送。
各次PUCCH重复与波束的映射关系可由RRC参数配置为轮流映射
(cyclic mapping)和连续映射(sequential mapping)。
相关技术中的3GPP R17支持PDCCH单频网络(Single Frequency Network,SFN)传输方案和PDSCH SFN传输方案。
具体的,RRC信令配置PDCCH或PDSCH的SFN传输方案。其中,PDCCH只能是在USS或Type3CSS上监听。
MAC CE命令可以激活2个TCI state,用于PDCCH使用2个波束进行SFN传输。
SFN传输方案中包括方案1(scheme1)(UE高级接收机)和预补偿。其中,SFN PDCCH(方案1)可以调度sTRP PDSCH(UE能力(capability)),SFN PDCCH(方案1,预补偿)可以调度SFN PDSCH(方案1或预补偿,两个模式一一对应调度),sTRP PDCCH(仅与USS或type3CSS关联(only associated with终端专用搜索空间(UE-specific Search Space,USS)或第三类型公共搜索空间(type3Common Search Space,type3CSS)))可以调度sTRP PDSCH(legacy)or SFN PDSCH(scheme1+预补偿),sTRP PDCCH associated with CSS or CSS+USS可以调度sTRP PDSCH。但是,SFN PDCCH不能调度3GPP R16中的PDSCH传输方案。
本申请实施例中,可以将unified TCI framework应用于上述mTPR场景下的PDCCH、PDSCH、PUSCH、SRS和CSI-RS的TCI确定方案。
在实施中,所述M个第一TCI状态包括以下至少一项:M1个joint TCI状态、M2个separate DL TCI状态以及M3个separate UL TCI状态,M1、M2和M3分别为大于或者等于0的整数,且M1、M2和M3中的至少一个大于0。
在实施中,上述M通常可以等2,当然,在CJT传输模式下,M可以也可能大于2(例如:M=4),或者,M也可以等于1,为了便于说明,以下实施例中通常以在非CJT传输模式下,M=2,且在CJT传输模式下,M=4为典型举例进行说明,在此对第一TCI状态的数量不构成具体限定。
步骤202、所述终端从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态;其中,所述目标信道,包括:物理上行控制信道PUCCH、物理下行控制信道PDCCH、物理下行共享信道PDSCH和物理上行共享信道
PUSCH中的至少一项;所述目标信号包括:探测参考信号SRS和信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS中的至少一项。
其中,终端可以根据网络侧设备的指示、协议中预先约定的规则等方式来确定各个目标信道和/或目标信号使用的目标TCI状态。以使mTRP场景中的信道和/或信号(包括:PUCCH、PUSCH、UL RS、PDCCH、PDSCH、CSI-RS等),能够应用unified TCI状态。
在一种实现方式中,上述根据网络侧设备的指示来确定各个目标信道和/或目标信号使用的目标TCI状态的方式,可以是由网络侧设备指示各个信道或信号使用的TCI状态的标识,或者由网络侧设备指示各个信道或信号的第一标识与TCI状态之间的对应关系等,从而能够按照网络侧设备的指示来确定每一个信道或信号使用的TCI状态。
在另一种实现方式中,上述根据协议中预先约定的规则方式来确定各个目标信道和/或目标信号使用的目标TCI状态的方式,可以在协议中约定各个信道或信号的相关信息(如:信道或信号类型、需要的TCI状态数量、对应的标识等)与TCI状态之间的对应关系、各个信道或信号采用某一TCI状态的条件、各个信道或信号的TCI状态的选择范围等,从而能够基于议中预先约定的规则来确定每一个信道或信号使用的TCI状态。
作为一种可选的实施方式,所述终端从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,包括:
所述终端根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,其中,所述目标信息包括以下至少一项:
1)所述第一TCI状态的数量。在实施中,可以根据第一TCI状态的数量确定其中适用于目标信道和/或目标信号的TCI的数量与目标信道和/或目标信号需要的TCI状态的数量之间的数量关系,从而采取与两者的数量关系相匹配的策略来确定各个目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,例如:若第一TCI状态的数量大于或者等于目标信道和/或目标信号需要的TCI状态的数量,则可以根据所述M个第一TCI状态来更新目标信道和/或目标信号的全部TCI状态,若第一TCI状态的数量小于目标信道和/或目标信号需要的TCI状态的数量,则可以根据所述M个第一TCI状态来更新目标信道和/或目
标信号的部分TCI状态,或者调整目标信道和/或目标信号的传输模式;
2)所述第一TCI状态与第一标识信息之间的对应关系,所述第一标识信息用于标识所述目标信道和/或所述目标信号。在实施中,可以根据第一TCI状态与第一标识信息之间的对应关系来确定各个目标信道和/或所述目标信号对应的第一TCI状态,从而使目标信道和/或所述目标信号使用其对应的第一TCI状态。
可选地,所述第一TCI状态与第一标识信息之间的对应关系包括以下至少一项:
所述M个第一TCI状态的排列位置与所述第一标识信息的排列位置之间的对应关系;
网络侧设备指示的所述第一TCI状态与所述第一标识信息之间的对应关系。
在一种实现方式中,可以根据网络侧指示或者协议约定的M个第一TCI状态的排列位置与所述第一标识信息的排列位置之间的对应关系,来根据各个目标信道和/或信号的第一标识信息的排列位置来确定对应的第一TCI状态;
在另一种实现方式中,以根据网络侧指示的第一TCI状态与所述第一标识信息之间的对应关系,来指示各个第一标识信息对应的目标信道和/或信号使用的TCI状态。
3)所述目标信道和/或目标信号所对应的第一标识信息的数量。在实施中,可以根据目标信道和/或目标信号所对应的第一标识信息的数量来判断目标信道和/或目标信号需要的第一TCI状态的数量,例如:每一个SRS资源集(SRS resource set)中的SRS资源(SRS resource)使用该SRS资源集对应的同一个第一TCI状态;
4)所述目标信道和/或目标信号对应的第一标识信息的值。在实施中,可以根据目标信道和/或目标信号所对应的第一标识信息的值来确定该第一标识信息的值对应的第一TCI状态作为该目标信道和/或目标信号使用的TCI状态;
5)所述M个第一TCI状态的排列顺序或位置。在实施中,可以将M个第一TCI状态的排列顺序或位置作为第一TCI状态与目标信道和/或目标信号
之间的对应关系的依据,例如:排列于第一位的第一TCI状态与取值最小的第一标识信息的目标信道和/或目标信号对应,排列于第二位的第一TCI状态与取值大于最小的第一标识信息的最小的一个第一标识信息的目标信道和/或目标信号对应;
6)所述目标信道和/或目标信号所对应的第一标识信息的排列顺序。在实施中,可以将各个第一标识信息的排列顺序作为第一TCI状态与目标信道和/或目标信号之间的对应关系的依据,例如:排列于第一位的第一TCI状态与排列于第一位的第一标识信息的目标信道和/或目标信号对应,排列于第二位的第一TCI状态与排列于第二位的第一标识信息的目标信道和/或目标信号对应;
7)所述目标信道和/或目标信号的类型。在实施中,不同类型的目标信道和/或目标信号其使用的TCI状态的类型、数量等可能不同,可以按照不同的对应规则来从M个第一TCI状态中确定其使用的TCI状态;
8)所述目标信道和/或目标信号的传输模式。该目标信道和/或目标信号的传输模式可以包括:重复(repetition)传输模式、多波束同时传输(例如:单频网络(Single Frequency Network,SFN)传输、频分复用(Frequency Division Multiplex,FDM)、空分复用(Space Division Multiplex,SDM)等传输模式、预设传输模式(即无repetition的单波束传输模式)或所述预设传输模式、所述重复传输模式以及所述多波束同时传输的模式动态切换的传输模式。需要说明的是,以下实施例中,为了便于说明,将多波束同时传输的模式统一称之为SFN传输模式,在此不构成具体限定。在实施中,不同传输模式的目标信道和/或目标信号其使用的TCI状态的数量等可能不同,可以按照不同的对应规则来从M个第一TCI状态中确定对应模型下的TCI状态;
9)所述目标信道和/或目标信号的时域行为。其中,时域行为可以包括周期、半持续、非周期,不同时域行为的目标信道和/或目标信号,其触发或调度或配置的流程可能不同,此时,可以基于目标信道和/或目标信号的时域行为相匹配的规则来确定对应模型下的TCI状态,例如:对于非周期的信号,可以复用触发该非周期信号的DCI中的指示域来指示其使用的TCI状态;
10)第一信息或第二信息,所述第一信息表示第一下行控制信息DCI调
度了PUSCH或PDSCH,所述第二信息表示第一DCI未调度PUSCH或PDSCH,所述第一DCI用于触发所述目标信号或者调度所述目标信道。在实施中,若触发所述目标信号或者调度所述目标信道的第一DCI还调度了PUSCH或PDSCH,则可以确定所述目标信号或者目标信道的TCI状态,与PUSCH或PDSCH各自的TCI状态可以相同或不同或相互对应;
11)所述第一DCI的目标指示域,所述目标指示域用于指示所述M个第一TCI状态中的至少一个。在实施中,可以通过第一DCI的目标指示域来指示目标信号或者目标信道以及PUSCH或PDSCH中的至少一个使用的第一TCI状态。
需要说明的是,为了便于区分本申请中用于指示用于CSI-RS resource的TCI状态的field和用于指示调度的PDSCH使用的TCI状态的field,将第一DCI中的目标指示域区分为第一field、第二field和第三field,其中,第一field用于指示触发的SRS资源的TCI状态;第二field用于指示触发的CSI-RS resource的TCI状态;第三field用于指示调度的PDSCH或PUSCH的TCI状态。
12)N个预设TCI状态,所述公共波束信息包括所述N个预设TCI状态,N为小于或者等于M的正整数。
可选地,所述TCI状态确定方法还包括:
所述终端根据第三信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定所述N个预设TCI状态,其中,所述第三信息由网络侧设备指示或者由协议约定;
所述终端根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,包括:
所述终端根据目标信息,从所述N个预设TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态。
本实施方式中,上述N个预设TCI状态可以是网络侧设备指示或者协议中约定的从所述M个第一TCI状态中选择的N个TCI状态,这样,后续确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI时,可以从该N个预设TCI状态中选择,这样,可以缩小TCI状态的选择范围。
13)所述N个预设TCI状态与所述第一标识信息之间的对应关系。该N
个预设TCI状态与所述第一标识信息之间的对应关系,与上述M个第一TCI状态与所述第一标识信息之间的对应关系相似,在此不再赘述。
在实施中,根据目标信道和/或目标信号的类型、传输模式等的不同,该目标信道和/或目标信号所需的TCI状态的数量、类型等也会发生改变,这样,就会存在网络侧设备指示的第一TCI状态的数量大于、小于或等于所述目标信道和/或目标信号所需的TCI状态的数量的情况。
可选地,在目标信号包括SRS的情况下,上述第一标识信息包括以下至少一项:
SRS资源集标识信息,在实施中,一个SRS资源集可以包括至少一个SRS资源,此时,目标信号包括SRS资源集标识信息所标识的SRS资源集中的全部SRS资源的SRS;
SRS资源标识信息,此时,目标信号包括SRS资源标识信息所标识的SRS资源的SRS。
可选地,在目标信号包括CSI-RS的情况下,上述第一标识信息包括以下至少一项:
信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS资源集(CSI-RS resource set)标识信息,在实施中,一个CSI-RS资源集可以包括至少一个CSI-RS资源组(CSI-RS resource group),且每一个CSI-RS资源组可以包括至少一个CSI-RS资源(CSI-RS resource),此时,目标信号包括CSI-RS资源集标识信息所标识的CSI-RS资源集中的全部CSI-RS资源组中的全部CSI-RS资源上的CSI-RS;
CSI-RS资源组标识信息,此时,目标信号包括CSI-RS资源组标识信息所标识的CSI-RS资源组中的全部CSI-RS资源上的CSI-RS;
CSI-RS资源标识信息,此时,目标信号包括CSI-RS资源标识信息所标识的CSI-RS资源上的CSI-RS。
可选地,在目标信道包括PDCCH的情况下,上述第一标识信息包括以下至少一项:
控制资源集CORESET组标识信息,其中,一个CORESET组可以包括至少一个CORESET,此时,目标信道可以包括CORESET组标识信息所标识的CORESET组内的全部CORESET上的PDCCH;
CORESET标识信息,此时,目标信道可以包括CORESET标识信息所标识的CORESET上的PDCCH;
搜索空间集标识信息,此时,目标信道可以包括搜索空间集标识信息所标识的搜索空间集上的PDCCH。
可选地,在目标信道包括PDSCH或PUSCH的情况下,上述第一标识信息包括以下至少一项:
所述目标信道的解调参考信号(Demodulation Reference Signal,DMRS)组标识信息;
所述目标信道的DMRS端口标识信息;
所述目标信道的频域资源标识信息;
所述目标信道的层标识信息。
基于上述DMRS组标识信息、DMRS端口标识信息、频域资源标识信息、层标识信息,可以标识PDSCH或PUSCH的DMRS组(group)、DMRS端口(port)、频域资源、层(layer),这样,可以指示PDSCH或PUSCH的各个DMRS group、DMRS port、频域资源或layer使用的TCI状态。
当然,在目标信道包括PUCCH的情况下,上述第一标识信息包括PUCCH资源或PUCCH资源组的标识信息,例如:PUCCH resource ID或PUCCH resource group ID,在此并不穷举。
本实施方式中,通过上述第一标识信息可以对目标信道或目标信号进行标识,从而可以根据该标识与TCI状态之间的对应关系来确定各个标识对应的目标信道或目标信号所使用的TCI状态。
下面结合具体的应用场景,对本申请实施例提供的TCI状态的确定方法进行具体说明:
场景一、根据指示的unified TCI state,确定SRS的目标TCI state。
网络侧设备可以配置1个或多个SRS resource set,其中,SRS resource set的用法(usage)可由网络配置为码本(codebook)、非码本(non-codebook)、天线切换(antenna switching)、波束管理(beam management)等。
在实施中,可以由网络侧设备来配置使能或者不使能SRS resource set使用unified TCI state,例如:在SRS resource set的配置信息中将参数接受统一
TCI状态(followUnifiedTCIstate)的值设置为使能(enabled),以使能SRS resource set使用unified TCI state。
此外,SRS可以是周期性的SRS或非周期性的SRS或半持续的SRS。下面提供两种方式,来确定SRS的目标TCI状态:
方式一:对非周期性的SRS采用与其他时域行为的SRS不同的方式来确定目标TCI状态:
对于非周期性的SRS,其可以由第一DCI触发,此时,可以根据以下至少一项确定该非周期SRS的目标TCI状态:
作为一种可选地实施方式,在所述第一DCI用于调度PUSCH的情况下,所述目标指示域指示所述第一DCI调度的PUSCH的TCI状态,所述M个第一TCI状态包括所述第一DCI调度的PUSCH的TCI状态;
所述终端根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,包括:
所述终端确定目标信号的目标TCI状态包括所述目标指示域所指示的TCI状态,所述目标信号包括以下至少一项:
所述终端需要发送的SRS资源集中的SRS,其中,所述终端需要发送的SRS资源集根据所述第一DCI触发的SRS资源集标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;
所述终端需要发送的SRS资源中的SRS,其中,所述终端需要发送的SRS资源根据所述第一DCI触发的SRS资源标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述第一DCI的目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;
所述第一DCI触发的全部SRS资源集或SRS资源中的SRS。
其中,SRS资源集标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,可以是SRS资源集标识信息与所述M个第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,或者是SRS资源集标识信息与所述N个预设TCI状态之间的对应关系,在此不作具体限定。
本实施方式中,在触发SRS的第一DCI还调度了PUSCH的情况下,该第一DCI中的目标指示域所指示的TCI状态可以优先用于调度的PUSCH,且该第一DCI所触发的SRS的全部或者部分可以使用目标指示域所指示的
TCI状态。
作为一种可能的实现方式,可以在第一DCI所触发的SRS resource set的数量、或第一DCI所触发的SRS resource set中的SRS resource的数量,与第一DCI的第一field指示的TCI state的数量相等,或者SRS resource set中SRS resource的TCI state与该第一field指示的TCI state对应相同的情况下,终端可以确定目标信号包括第一DCI触发的全部SRS资源集或SRS资源中的SRS,以及确定各个SRS与第一field指示的TCI state之间的对应关系,从而确定各个SRS使用的TCI state。
例如:网络侧设备通过第一field指示PUSCH使用M1个jointTCI状态和M3个separate UL TCI状态中的1个TCI state,若第一DCI指示触发了一个SRS resource set,则该一SRS resource set中SRS resource也使用第一field指示的TCI state。
作为一种可能的实现方式,在目标信号包括所述终端需要发送的SRS资源集中的SRS的情况下,所述终端根据所述第一DCI触发的SRS资源集标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定需要发送的SRS资源集,以及各个SRS资源集对应的第一TCI状态。也就是说,终端仅需要发送第一field指示的TCI state所对应的SRS资源集中的SRS,对于DCI所触发的,且不与第一field指示的TCI state所对应的SRS资源集中的SRS则可以不发送。
例如:网络侧设备通过第一field指示PUSCH使用M1/M3个TCI state中的1个TCI state,且网络侧设备预先配置或协议预先约定了SRS resource set与M1/M3个TCI state之间的对应关系,则仅发送被触发的SRS resource set中的,且与第一field指示的1个TCI state所对应的SRS resource set中的SRS。
再例如:网络侧设备通过第一field指示PUSCH使用M1/M3个TCI state中的K>1个TCI state,且第一DCI触发了K个SRS resource set,则第一field指示的K个TCI state分别用作K个SRS resource set中SRS resource的TCI state,其中,K个SRS resource set与K个TCI state一一对应。
作为一种可能的实现方式,在目标信号包括所述终端需要发送的SRS资源中的SRS的情况下,所述终端根据所述第一DCI触发的SRS资源标识信
息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定需要发送的SRS资源,以及各个SRS资源对应的第一TCI状态。也就是说,终端仅需要发送第一field指示的TCI state所对应的SRS资源中的SRS,对于DCI所触发的,且不与第一field指示的TCI state所对应的SRS资源中的SRS则可以不发送。
例如:网络侧设备通过第一field指示PUSCH使用M1/M3个TCI state中的L(L≥1)个TCI state,且第一DCI触发了1个SRS resource set,该SRS resource set包含L个SRS resource,则第一field指示的L个TCI state分别用作触发的SRS resource set中的L个SRS resource的TCI state。
作为一种可选地实施方式,在所述第一DCI用于调度PDSCH的情况下,所述目标指示域指示所述第一DCI调度的PDSCH的TCI状态,所述M个第一TCI状态包括与第三TCI状态对应相同码点的TCI状态和所述第三TCI状态,所述第三TCI状态包括所述第一DCI调度的PDSCH的TCI状态;
所述终端根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,包括:
所述终端确定目标信号的目标TCI状态包括与所述第三TCI状态对应相同码点的TCI状态或所述第三TCI状态,所述目标信号包括以下至少一项:
所述终端需要发送的SRS资源集中的SRS,其中,所述终端需要发送的SRS资源集根据所述第一DCI触发的SRS资源集标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;
所述终端需要发送的SRS资源中的SRS,其中,所述终端需要发送的SRS资源根据所述第一DCI触发的SRS资源标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述第一DCI的目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;
所述第一DCI触发的全部SRS资源集或SRS资源中的SRS。
本实施方式与上一可选的实施方式中,在第一DCI调度PUSCH时,所述终端根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态的过程相似,不同之处在于:在第一DCI调度PUSCH时,该第一DCI中的第一field所指示的TCI状态为joint TCI状态和/或UL TCI状态;在第一DCI调度PDSCH时,该第一DCI中的第一field所指示的TCI
状态为joint TCI状态和/或DL TCI状态。而SRS需要使用UL TCI状态,本实施方式中,若第一field所指示的TCI状态为DL TCI状态,则从与该DL TCI状态对应相同码点的UL TCI状态中确定用于SRS的TCI状态,对于各个SRS资源集/资源与TCI状态之间的对应关系可以参考上一可选的实施方式,在此不再赘述。
值得提出的是,以上实施例中,需要发送的SRS资源集/SRS资源,可以采用以下方式确定:
1a)通过第一DCI中的SRS请求(SRS request)域所指示的SRS触发状态(SRS trigger state)来确定需要发送的SRS resource set(需要说明的是,相关技术中SRS trigger state最多支持4个trigger state,本申请实施例中,M可以大于2,例如:M=4,此时需要扩充SRS request域的比特尺寸(bit size))。
例如:假设第一个SRS resource set:其中ID=2,usage为codebook,trigger state(触发状态)为1和2,对应UL TCI state1;第二个SRS resource set:其中ID=4,usage为codebook,trigger state为2和3,对应UL TCI state2。这样,当DCI中的SRS request域指示的SRS trigger state=1时,发送第一个SRS resource set中的SRS resource;当DCI中的SRS request域指示的SRS trigger state=2时,发送第一个SRS resource set中的SRS resource和第二个SRS resource set中的SRS resource;当DCI中的SRS request域指示的SRS trigger state=3时,发送第二个SRS resource set中的SRS resource。
2a)在第一DCI中的SRS request域指示的SRS trigger state对应X=2个SRS resource set,且两个SRS resource set的usage均为codebook或non-codebook(即有两个usage为codebook或non-codebook的SRS resource set对应相同的trigger state)时,第一DCI中的SRS资源集指示域(SRS resource set indicator field)指示触发对应相同trigger state的X=2个SRS resource set中的一个或2个,以及指示两个SRS resource set的顺序。
例如:假设第一个SRS resource set:其中ID=2,usage为codebook,trigger state为2,对应UL TCI state1;第二个SRS resource set:其中ID=4,usage为codebook,trigger state为2,对应UL TCI state2。这样,当DCI中的SRS request域指示的SRS trigger state=2时,若DCI中的SRS resource set indicator
field指示0,发送第一个SRS resource set中的SRS resource;若DCI中的SRS resource set indicator field指示1,发送第二个SRS resource set中的SRS resource;若DCI中的SRS resource set indicator field指示2或3,发送第一个SRS resource set中的SRS resource和第二个SRS resource set中的SRS resource。
当然,上述触发SRS的第一DCI也可能没有调度PUSCH或PDSCH,此时,第一DCI触发的SRS使用的TCI状态可以采用以下方式确定。
作为一种可选的实施方式,在所述目标信号包括SRS,且所述SRS的周期行为是非周期性的情况下,所述终端根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,包括:
若第一DCI用于触发K个SRS资源集,所述第一DCI未调度PDSCH或PUSCH,且所述第一DCI的目标指示域指示K个第一TCI状态,则所述终端根据所述K个SRS资源集与所述K个第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,确定所述K个SRS资源集中的每一个SRS资源集的TCI状态,其中,所述目标TCI状态包括所述K个第一TCI状态,K为正整数;和/或,
若第一DCI用于触发K个SRS资源集,所述第一DCI未调度PDSCH或PUSCH,且所述第一DCI的目标指示域指示X个第一TCI状态,则所述终端根据所述K个SRS资源集与所述X个第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,确定所述K个SRS资源集中的每一个SRS资源的TCI状态,其中,所述目标信道和/或目标信号包括所述K个SRS资源集,所述目标TCI状态包括所述X个第一TCI状态,其中,X表示所述K个SRS资源集包括的SRS资源的总数,X为正整数。
本实施方式中,同一个SRS资源集中的SRS资源可以使用相同的TCI状态,且不同的SRS资源集中的SRS资源可以使用不同的TCI状态,或者,同一个SRS资源集中的不同SRS资源也可以使用不同的TCI状态。
例如:假设所述M个第一TCI状态包括M1=4个joint TCI state和M3=4个UL TCI state,且第一DCI中的第一field指示在M1/M3个TCI state中的用于各SRS resource的目标TCI state,则可以区分以下情况来确定各个SRS resource使用的TCI state:
情况1、第一DCI仅触发了K=1个SRS resource set时,第一field指示
一个TCI state(可以是从网络侧设备指示的M个第一TCI状态中使用第一field指示其中的一个TCI state,或者从网络侧设备指示的M个第一TCI状态中先确定N个预设TCI state,再使用第一field指示N个预设TCI state中的一个TCI state)为该SRS resource set中所有SRS resource的TCI state(如从4个TCI state中指示其中的1个);
情况2、第一DCI仅触发了K=1个SRS resource set(包含L个SRS resource)时,第一field指示L个TCI state(可以为从网络侧设备指示的M个第一TCI状态中使用第一field指示其中的L个TCI state,或者从网络侧设备指示的M个第一TCI状态中先确定N个预设TCI state,再使用第一field指示N个预设TCI state中的L个TCI state),分别用作该SRS resource set中的L个SRS resource的TCI state。例如:第一TCI state用作第一SRS resource的TCI state、第二TCI state用作第二SRS resource的TCI state,并依此类推。
可选地,上述L个TCI state与L个SRS resource之间的对应关系,可以通过网络侧设备的信令指示,如指示第一SRS resource对应L个中的第一TCI state或第一个TCI state,以此类推,或者,上述L个TCI state与L个SRS resource之间的对应关系无需网络侧设备的信令指示,而是按照SRS resource ID和TCI state的排序(TCI state的排序可以是在一个码点(codepoint)对应的所有TCI state ID的排序,或者各TCI state对应的码点(codepoint)之间的排序)相对应,如:最小SRS resource ID对应L个TCI state中的第一个TCI state;
情况3、第一DCI触发了K>1个SRS resource set时,第一field指示K个TCI state(可以为从网络侧设备指示的M个第一TCI状态中使用第一field指示其中的K个TCI state,或者从网络侧设备指示的M个第一TCI状态中先确定N个预设TCI state,再使用第一field指示N个预设TCI state中的K个TCI state),分别用作各SRS resource set中的SRS resource的TCI state,例如:第一TCI state用作第一SRS resource set中的SRS resource的TCI state、第二TCI state用作第二SRS resource set中的SRS resource的TCI state,并依此类推。
可选地,与上述L个TCI state与L个SRS resource之间的对应关系相似
的,上述K个SRS resource set与K个TCI state之间的对应关系,也可以通过网络侧设备的信令指示,如指示第一set对应K个中的第一TCI state或第一个TCI state,并依此类推;或对应关系无需网络侧设备的信令指示,而是按照SRS resource set ID和TCI state的排序相对应,如最小SRS resource set ID对应K个中的第一个TCI state。
以上实施方式中,对如何根据第一DCI的指示来确定各个非周期的SRS(即由第一DCI触发的SRS)使用的TCI状态,区分第一DCI是否调度了PUSCH或PDSCH的情况,提供了解决方案。
方式二:以下实施例中还提出了一种可以对任意时域行为(如周期、半持续、非周期)的SRS,采用相同的方式来确定各个SRS使用的TCI状态的实施方式:
1b)网络使用第一信令(如RRC信令或MAC CE命令或DCI信令),指示各SRS资源集/资源使用的一个或多个TCI状态。其中,例如:使用网络指示或协议约定从M个第一TCI状态中确定的N个预设TCI状态,或者使用M个第一TCI状态,再根据第一信令确定N个预设TCI状态或M个第一TCI状态中用于各SRS资源集/资源的TCI状态。
2b)根据网络指示的M个第一TCI状态与SRS resource set/resource的对应关系,确定SRS的TCI state。
例如:根据网络指示的M个第一TCI状态在其对应的codepoint中的先后排列顺序(或各第一TCI状态对应的codepoint的排列顺序)与SRS resource set ID的从小到大排序,进行一一对应,或者一个第一TCI状态对应多个SRS resource set,或者多个第一TCI状态对应一个SRS resource set。
其中,若一个SRS resource set对应多个TCI state时,该SRS resource set中的SRS resource与该多个TCI state也有对应关系,可以是SRS resource ID从小到大和该多个TCI state(或多个TCI state对应的codepoint)的排列顺序对应。
3b)根据网络指示或协议约定,从网络指示的M个第一TCI状态中确定N个预设TCI state,再采用与上述方式2a)类似的方式,根据N个预设TCI state与SRS resource set的对应关系,和/或,根据N个预设TCI state与SRS resource
的对应关系,确定SRS的目标TCI state。
作为一种可选的实施方式,m为所述M个第一TCI状态或所述N个预设TCI状态包括的适用于所述目标信道和/或目标信号的第一TCI状态的数量,K为所述目标信道和/或目标信号所对应的第一标识信息的数量;
所述终端根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,包括:
在m等于K的情况下,所述终端确定所述目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态包括所述m个第一TCI状态;和/或,
在m大于K的情况下,所述终端将所述m个第一TCI状态中的,且位于预设位置或来自所述网络侧设备的第一指示信息所指示的K个TCI状态,确定为目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态;和/或,
在m小于K的情况下,所述终端将所述m个第一TCI状态,确定为m个第一标识信息对应的目标信道和/或目标信号的TCI状态,所述m个第一标识信息为所述K个第一标识信息中的,且排列于预设位置或来自所述网络侧设备的第二指示信息所指示的m个第一标识信息;和/或,
所述终端确定所述目标TCI状态包括所述m个第一TCI状态和所述目标信道和/或目标信号原有的(K-m)个TCI状态。
其中,在m大于K时,上述第一指示信息可以用于指示部分第一TCI状态,例如:基于第一指示信息先从M个第一TCI状态中指示N个预设TCI状态,此时,K个TCI状态可以是N个预设TCI状态中的全部或者部分,当然,上述K个TCI状态也可以是M个第一TCI状态/N个预设TCI状态中排列于预设位置的K个,如:排列靠前的K个,或者,上述第一指示信息可以用于指示K个目标信道和/或目标信号对应的第一TCI状态。
在m小于K时,上述第二指示信息可以用于指示终端需要发送的目标信道和/或目标信号,或者,用于指示m个第一TCI状态对应的目标信道和/或目标信号。
例如:假设网络侧设备配置了K个usage为codebook或noncodebook的SRS resource set或SRS resource时,若网络侧设备指示了M1≥1个joint TCI state或M3≥1个UL TCI state(即m等于M1或M3),则所述K个SRS resource
set或SRS resource与UL unified TCI的对应关系,包括以下之一:
1c)K=m,则按照m个UL unified TCI state的排列顺序与K个SRS resource set/SRS resource的排列顺序,或者按照m个UL unified TCI state与K个SRS resource set/SRS resource的对应关系,将m与K个SRS resource set/SRS resource一一对应;
2c)K>m,K个SRS resource set/SRS resource中的前m个与m个UL unified TCI state一一对应,其他SRS resource set/SRS resource不传输,其中,K个SRS resource set/SRS resource中的前m个可以是如上实施例中确定的终端需要发送的SRS resource set/SRS resource,或者是网络侧设备指示的使用m个UL unified TCI state的SRS resource set/SRS resource;此时,对于剩余的(K-m)个SRS resource set/SRS resource,可以不发送。
3c)K<m,K个SRS resource set/SRS resource与K个UL unified TCI state一一对应,其中,K个UL unified TCI state可以是M1/M3个UL unified TCI state中排列靠前的K个,或者是网络侧设备指示或协议中约定的N个预设TCI状态包括K个UL unified TCI state,或者网络侧设备配置指示K个SRS resource set/SRS resource分别使用的UL unified TCI state;此时,对于剩余的(K-m)个UL unified TCI state可以用于其他信道或信号。
作为一种可选的实施方式,在M等于1的情况下,所述终端从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,包括:
所述终端根据所述1个第一TCI状态更新所述目标信道和/或目标信号原有的TCI状态中的第一预设TCI状态,得到所述目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,所述第一预设TCI状态为所述目标信道和/或目标信号原有的TCI状态中的一个;或者,
所述终端确定所述目标信道或目标信号基于所述1个第一TCI状态进行单波束或单TRP传输;或者,
所述终端确定所述目标信道和/或目标信号共用所述1个第一TCI状态。
其中,所述终端确定所述目标信道和/或目标信号基于所述1个第一TCI状态进行单波束或单TRP传输,包括:
所述终端确定需要传输的目标信道和/或目标信号包括与所述1个第一
TCI状态关联的目标信道和/或目标信号;或者,
所述终端确定需要传输的目标信道和/或目标信号包括与所述1个第一TCI状态对应的目标资源相关联的目标信道和/或目标信号;
其中,所述目标资源包括以下至少一项:
小区标识、物理小区标识、带宽部分(bandwidth Part,BWP)标识、发送接收点TRP标识、公共TCI状态池标识、公共TCI状态类型值、CORESET组标识、CORESET标识、信道组标识、CORESET池标识、搜索空间集标识、搜索空间ID、同步信号块SSB ID,SSB组ID。
例如:当网络指示了M1/M2/M3=1(即M=1)个unified TCI state的情况下,则可以根据以下方式确定目标信道/目标信号及其目标TCI状态:
1d)更新目标信道/目标信号当前所用TCI state中的预设TCI state,该预设TCI state可以是网络指示的且目标信道/目标信号当前使用的TCI state中的某个TCI state,或者,通过协议约定或默认的方式将预设TCI state固定为目标信道/目标信号当前所用TCI state中的某个TCI state(如:第一个TCI state),且未更新的TCI state保持不变,其中,目标信道/目标信号与上述预设TCI state对应(如网络侧设备指示对应关系,或者协议约定对应关系);
2d)将切换至单波束或单TRP的传输模式:
2d-1)根据该TCI state确定所需传输的SRS resource set/SRS resource。与该TCI state或TCI state所对应TRP相关联的SRS resource set/SRS resource,使用该TCI state。其余SRS resource set/SRS resource停止发送。或网络侧设备仅指示终端发送与该TCI state或TCI state所对应TRP相关联的SRS resource set/SRS resource。此时,目标信道/目标信号包括与该TCI state对应的SRS resource set/SRS resource,或者,目标信道/目标信号包括与TCI state所对应TRP相关联的SRS resource set/SRS resource。
2d-2)所有SRS resource set/SRS resource都使用该TCI state,即目标信道/目标信号包括所有SRS resource set/SRS resource。
本实施方式中,对于任意时域行为(如周期、半持续、非周期)的SRS,都可以采用相同的方式来确定目标TCI状态。
场景二、根据指示的unified TCI state,确定CSI-RS的TCI state信息。
其中,CSI-RS的用途可以是beam management、TRS、CSI获取(acquisition)等。且一个CSI-RS resource set中可以配置一个或多个CSI-RS resource group,每个CSI-RS resource group中又可以包括1个或多个CSI-RS resource。
这样,网络侧设备在配置CSI-RS使用unified TCI state时,可以是对各CSI-RS resource set、或各CSI-RS resource group、或各CSI-RS resource进行配置。如:第一TCI状态与第一标识信息之间的对应关系,可以是CSI-RS resource set ID或CSI-RS resource group ID或CSI-RS resource ID与第一TCI状态之间的对应关系。
其中,若第一TCI状态与第一标识信息之间的对应关系,是CSI-RS resource set ID与第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,则一个CSI-RS resource set内的全部CSI-RS resource可以使用相同的TCI状态;若第一TCI状态与第一标识信息之间的对应关系,是CSI-RS resource group ID与第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,则一个CSI-RS resource group内的全部CSI-RS resource可以使用相同的TCI状态;若第一TCI状态与第一标识信息之间的对应关系,是CSI-RS resource ID与第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,则各个CSI-RS resource可以使用互不相同的TCI状态。
此外,CSI-RS可以是周期性的CSI-RS或非周期性的CSI-RS或半持续的CSI-RS。下面提供两种方式,来确定CSI-RS的目标TCI状态:
方式一:对非周期性的CSI-RS采用与其他时域行为的CSI-RS不同的方式来确定目标TCI状态:
对于非周期性的CSI-RS,其可以由第一DCI触发,此时,可以根据以下至少一项确定该非周期CSI-RS的目标TCI状态:
作为一种可选的实施方式,在所述第一DCI用于调度PUSCH的情况下,所述目标指示域指示所述第一DCI调度的PUSCH的TCI状态,所述M个第一TCI状态包括与第二TCI状态对应相同码点的TCI状态和所述第二TCI状态,所述第二TCI状态包括所述第一DCI调度的PUSCH的TCI状态;
所述终端根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,包括:
所述终端确定目标信号的目标TCI状态包括与所述第二TCI状态对应相
同码点的TCI状态或所述第二TCI状态,其中,所述目标信号包括以下至少一项:
所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源集中的CSI-RS,其中,所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源集根据所述第一DCI触发的CSI-RS资源集标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;
所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源组中的CSI-RS,其中,所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源组根据所述第一DCI触发的CSI-RS资源组标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述第一DCI的目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;
所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源中的CSI-RS,其中,所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源根据所述第一DCI触发的CSI-RS资源标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述第一DCI的目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;
所述第一DCI触发的全部CSI-RS资源集或或CSI-RS资源组或CSI-RS资源中的CSI-RS。
其中,第二TCI状态可以包括joint TCIstate和/或UL TCI state,由于CSI-RS需要使用DL TCI state,则上述与第二TCI状态对应相同码点的TCI状态可以包括Joint TCI状态或与separate UL TCI对应相同码点的separate DL TCI state。
例如:假设第一DCI中的第二field指示了在M1个joint TCI state中的用于PUSCH的TCI state,所指示的TCI state也用于确定CSI-RS的目标TCI state;或者,
假设第一DCI中的第二field指示了在M3个separate UL TCI state中的用于PUSCH的UL TCI state。此时,由于CSI-RS需要使用DL TCI state,则第二field指示了PUSCH的UL TCI state后,可以确定PUSCH的TCI state。然后,根据与该UL TCI state对应同一个codepoint的DL TCI state,用来确定CSI-RS的目标TCI state;或者,
根据来自网络侧设备的指示先从M个第一TCI状态中确定N个预设TCI
状态,然后从N个预设TCI状态中确定CSI-RS的目标TCI state。
需要说明的是,上述由调度PUSCH的第一DCI触发的CSI-RS的目标TCI状态的确定过程与上述由调度PDSCH的第一DCI触发的SRS的目标TCI状态的确定过程相似,不同之处在于,CSI-RS的标识信息可以包括CSI-RS资源组标识信息,即一个CSI-RS资源集可以包括至少一个CSI-RS资源组,一个CSI-RS资源组又可以包括至少一个CSI-RS资源,CSI-RS的目标TCI状态的确定过程可以参考如上实施例中SRS的目标TCI状态的确定过程,在此不再赘述。
作为一种可选的实施方式,在所述第一DCI用于调度PDSCH的情况下,所述目标指示域指示所述第一DCI调度的PDSCH的TCI状态,所述M个第一TCI状态包括所述第一DCI调度的PDSCH的TCI状态;
所述终端根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,包括:
所述终端确定目标信号的目标TCI状态包括所述目标指示域所指示的TCI状态,所述目标信号包括以下至少一项:
所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源集中的CSI-RS,其中,所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源集根据所述第一DCI触发的CSI-RS资源集标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;
所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源组中的CSI-RS,其中,所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源组根据所述第一DCI触发的CSI-RS资源组标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述第一DCI的目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;
所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源中的CSI-RS,其中,所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源根据所述第一DCI触发的CSI-RS资源标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述第一DCI的目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;
所述第一DCI触发的全部CSI-RS资源集或或CSI-RS资源组或CSI-RS资源中的CSI-RS。
例如:第一DCI中的第二field指示了在M1/M2个TCI state中的用于PDSCH的TCI state(可以是一个或者多个),则第二field所指示的TCI state也用于确定也用于如下至少之一:
1e)根据CSI-RS resource set/resource group/resource与M1/M2个TCI state或与其中N个预设TCI状态的对应关系,以及根据第二field指示的TCI state,确定需发送的CSI-RS resource set/resource group/resource中的CSI-RS。
2e)确定被触发的所有CSI-RS resource set中的CSI-RS的目标TCI state,并发送这些CSI-RS。确定方式可以依据CSI-RS resource set或CSI-RS resource set中的CSI-RS resource group/resource与M1/M2个TCI state的对应关系,或CSI-RS resource set或CSI-RS resource set中的CSI-RS resource group/resource与N个预设TCI state的对应关系。
3e)触发的CSI-RS resource set的数量、或触发的CSI-RS resource set中CSI-RS resource group的数量、或触发的CSI-RS resource set中的CSI-RS resource的数量、或触发的CSI-RS resource set中的CSI-RS resource group的数量与不属于任意CSI-RS resource group的CSI-RS resource的数量之和,与第二field指示的TCI state相等,此时,第二field指示的TCI state与CSI-RS resource set或CSI-RS resource group或CSI-RS resource一一对应,或者,第二field指示的TCI state与CSI-RS resource group的CSI-RS resource以及不属于任意CSI-RS resource group的CSI-RS resource一一对应,从而使各个CSI-RS使用第二field指示的且各自对应的TCI state。
4e)CSI-RS resource set中CSI-RS resource的TCI state与第二field指示的TCI state对应相同。
例如:第二field指示PDSCH使用M1/M2个TCI state中的1个TCI state,触发的CSI-RS resource set中CSI-RS resource也使用这个TCI state,典型的,此时网络只配置了1个CSI-RS resource set。
再例如:网络指示PDSCH使用M1/M2个TCI state中的1个TCI state,网络预先配置或协议约定CSI-RS resource set/resource group/resource与M1/M2个TCI state具有对应关系,则仅发送被触发的CSI-RS resource set中的且与第二field指示的1个TCI state所对应的CSI-RS resource set/resource
group/resource中的CSI-RS。
再例如:第二field指示PDSCH使用M1/M2个TCI state中的K个TCI state,触发了1个CSI-RS resource set,该CSI-RS resource set包括K1个CSI-RS resource group,或者包括K2个CSI-RS resource,或者包括K1个CSI-RS resource group以及K3个不属于任意K1个CSI-RS resource group的CSI-RS resource,则在K≥K1时,K个TCI state分别用作CSI-RS resource set中K1个CSI-RS resource group的TCI state;在K≥K2时,K个TCI state分别用作K2个CSI-RS resource的TCI state;在K≥K1+K3时K个TCI state分别用作K1个CSI-RS resource group中的CSI-RS resource和K3个CSI-RS resource的TCI state。
再例如:第二field指示PDSCH使用M1/M2个TCI state中的K>1个TCI state,触发了K个CSI-RS resource set,K个TCI state分别用作各CSI-RS resource set中CSI-RS resource的TCI state。
需要说明的是,上述由调度PDSCH的第一DCI触发的CSI-RS的目标TCI状态的确定过程可以参考上述由调度PUSCH的第一DCI触发的SRS的目标TCI状态的确定过程相似,在此不再赘述。
作为一种可选的实施方式,在所述目标信号包括CSI-RS,且所述CSI-RS的周期行为是非周期性的情况下,所述终端根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,包括:
若第一DCI用于触发K个CSI-RS资源集,所述第一DCI未调度PDSCH或PUSCH,且所述第一DCI的目标指示域指示K个第一TCI状态,则所述终端根据所述K个CSI-RS资源集与所述K个第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,确定所述K个CSI-RS资源集中的每一个CSI-RS资源集的TCI状态,其中,所述目标TCI状态包括所述K个第一TCI状态,K为正整数;和/或,
若第一DCI用于触发K个CSI-RS资源集,所述第一DCI未调度PDSCH或PUSCH,且所述第一DCI的目标指示域指示X个第一TCI状态,则所述终端根据所述K个CSI-RS资源集与所述X个第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,确定所述K个CSI-RS资源集中的每一个CSI-RS资源组的TCI状态,其中,所述目标TCI状态包括所述X个第一TCI状态,其中,X表示所述K个CSI-RS
资源集包括的CSI-RS资源组的总数,X为正整数;和/或,
若第一DCI用于触发K个CSI-RS资源集,所述第一DCI未调度PDSCH或PUSCH,且所述第一DCI的目标指示域指示H个第一TCI状态,则所述终端根据所述K个CSI-RS资源集与所述H个第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,确定所述K个CSI-RS资源集中的每一个CSI-RS资源的TCI状态,其中,所述目标TCI状态包括所述H个第一TCI状态,其中,H表示所述K个CSI-RS资源集所包含的CSI-RS资源组中的CSI-RS资源的总数,H为正整数。
例如:第一DCI触发了非周期的CSI-RS,但未调度PUSCH或PDSCH,假设M个第一TCI状态包括M1=4个joint TCI state,或M个第一TCI状态包括M2=4个DL TCI state,则可以根据第一DCI的第二field的指示,在M1/M2个TCI state中确定用于各CSI-RS resource的目标TCI state:
仅触发了K=1个CSI-RS resource set(其中有K1个CSI-RS resource group包括共有K2个CSI-RS resource,此外还有K3个CSI-RS resource不属于任意CSI-RS resource group,K1>=0,K3>=0)时,第二field指示TCI state(从M1/M2个中指示,或者从M1/M2中的N个预设TCI状态中指示),分别用作K个CSI-RS resource set的TCI state(每个CSI-RS resource set中的CSI-RS resource对应一个TCI state),或者分别用作K1个CSI-RS resource group的TCI state(即每个CSI-RS resource group中的CSI-RS resource对应一个TCI state),或者分别用作K3个CSI-RS resource的TCI state,或者分别用作K1个CSI-RS resource group中的CSI-RS resource和K3个CSI-RS resource的TCI state。
其中,K1个CSI-RS resource group和/或K3个CSI-RS resource与TCI state之间的对应关系,可以通过网络信令指示;或对应关系无需网络信令指示,而是按照CSI-RS resource group ID和/或CSI-RS resource ID与TCI state的排序相对应,如最小CSI-RS resource group ID/resource ID对应排在最前面的TCI state,其中TCI state的排序是指DL TCI state的顺序。
需要说明的是,上述第一DCI未调度PUSCH/PDSCH,且该第一DCI触发的CSI-RS的目标TCI状态的确定过程与上述未调度PUSCH/PDSCH的第一DCI触发的SRS的目标TCI状态的确定过程相似,不同之处在于,CSI-RS
的标识信息可以包括CSI-RS资源组标识信息,即一个CSI-RS资源集可以包括至少一个CSI-RS资源组,一个CSI-RS资源组又可以包括至少一个CSI-RS资源,此时,一个CSI-RS资源集内的全部CSI-RS资源可以使用相同的TCI状态,或者,一个CSI-RS资源集内的不同CSI-RS资源组内的CSI-RS资源可以使用不同的TCI状态,或者,每一个不同的CSI-RS资源可以使用不同的TCI状态,在此不再赘述。
方式二:以下实施例中还提出了一种可以对任意时域行为(如周期、半持续、非周期)的CSI-RS,采用相同的方式来确定各个CSI-RS使用的TCI状态的实施方式:
1f)网络使用第二信令(如RRC信令或MAC CE命令或DCI信令),指示各CSI-RS resource set/resource group/resource使用N个预设TCI state的一个或多个TCI state。其中,N个预设TCI state是根据网络指示或协议约定从M1/M2/M3个unified TCI state中确定的。
2f)根据网络指示的unified TCI state(joint or DL TCI state)与CSI-RS resource set/resource group/resource的对应关系,确定CSI-RS的目标TCI state
例如:根据网络指示的unified TCI state(joint or DL TCI state)在其对应的codepoint中的先后排列顺序(或各unified TCI state对应的codepoint的排列顺序)与CSI-RS resource set/resource group/resource id的从小到大排序,进行一一对应、一多对应、多一对应。其中,若一个CSI-RS resource set对应多个TCI state时,该CSI-RS resource set中的CSI-RS resource group/resource与该多个TCI state也有对应关系,可以是CSI-RS resource group ID/resource ID从小到大和该多个TCI state(或多个TCI state对应的codepoint)的排列顺序。
例如:一个CSI-RS resource set包括K个CSI-RS resource group或CSI-RS resource时,如果指示了m(m=M1/M2,且m≥1)个DL unified TCI state,则所述K个CSI-RS resource group或CSI-RS resource与DL unified TCI state的对应,包括以下之一:
K=m,按顺序一一对应或配置对应关系;
K>m,K个CSI-RS resource group或CSI-RS resource中的前m个与m个DL unified TCI state一一对应,或者网络配置指示m个CSI-RS resource
group或CSI-RS resource要使用的m个DL unified TCI。其他CSI-RS resource group或CSI-RS resource不传输.
K<m,K个CSI-RS resource group或CSI-RS resource与K个DL TCI state一一对应,这K个DL TCI state是根据网路侧设备的指示或协议约定确定的,或者默认是m个DL TCI state的前K个。
需要说明的是,对于场景一中,在M等于1的情况下,所述终端从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,的实施方式同样适用于CSI-RS。
例如:当网络指示了M1/M2/M3=1(即M=1)个unified TCI state的情况下,则可以根据以下方式确定CSI-RS及其目标TCI状态:
1g)更新CSI-RS当前所用TCI state中的预设TCI state,该预设TCI state可以是网络指示的且CSI-RS当前使用的TCI state中的某个TCI state,或者,通过协议约定或默认的方式将预设TCI state固定为CSI-RS当前所用TCI state中的某个TCI state(如:第一个TCI state),且未更新的TCI state保持不变,其中,CSI-RS与上述预设TCI state对应(如网络侧设备指示对应关系,或者协议约定对应关系);
2g)将切换至单波束或单TRP的传输模式:
2g-1)根据该TCI state确定所需传输的CSI-RS resource set/resource group/resource。与该TCI state或TCI state所对应TRP相关联的CSI-RS resource set/resource group/resource,使用该TCI state。其余CSI-RS resource set/resource group/resource停止发送。或网络侧设备仅指示向终端发送的与该TCI state或TCI state所对应TRP相关联的CSI-RS resource set/resource group/resource。此时,目标信道/目标信号包括与该TCI state对应的CSI-RS resource set/resource group/resource,或者,目标信道/目标信号包括与TCI state所对应TRP相关联的CSI-RS resource set/resource group/resource.
2g-2)所有CSI-RS resource set/resource group/resource都使用该TCI state,即目标信道/目标信号包括所有CSI-RS resource set/resource group/resource。
本实施方式中,对于任意时域行为(如周期、半持续、非周期)的CSI-RS,都可以采用类似于SRS相同的方式来确定目标TCI状态。
场景三、根据指示的unified TCI state,确定PDCCH的目标TCI state。
作为一种可选的实施方式,在所述目标信道包括PDCCH的情况下,所述终端根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,包括:
所述终端根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定所述PDCCH对应的预设CORESET或预设CORESET组或预设搜索空间集的目标TCI状态;
在所述预设CORESET或预设CORESET组或预设搜索空间集原有的TCI状态关联第二标识,且所述预设CORESET或预设CORESET组或预设搜索空间集的目标TCI状态关联第三标识,所述第二标识和所述第三标识用于标识目标资源的情况下,所述方法还包括:
所述终端将所述预设CORESET或预设CORESET组或预设搜索空间集切换为与所述第三标识关联;或者,
所述终端将所述预设CORESET或预设CORESET组或预设搜索空间集切换为通过所述第三标识关联的目标资源传输;或者,
所述终端由所述第二标识关联的目标资源切换至所述第三标识关联的目标资源。
可选地,所述目标资源包括以下至少一项:
小区标识、物理小区标识(Physical Cell Identifier,PCI)、带宽部分(Bandwidth Part,BWP)标识、发送接收点TRP标识、公共TCI状态池标识、公共TCI状态类型值、CORESET组标识、CORESET标识、信道组标识、CORESET池标识、搜索空间集标识、搜索空间ID、同步信号块SSB ID,SSB组ID。
在一种可能的实现方式中,可以根据网络指示或协议约定从M1/M2个TCI state中选择N个预设TCI state,再根据网络指示或协议约定从N个预设TCI state中确定CORESET或CORESET group或搜索空间集(search space set)的目标TCI state。这样,根据CORESET/CORESET组/搜索空间集与TCI state之间的对应关系,可以确定各个CORESET或各个CORESET组或各个预设搜索空间集中的PDCCH使用的TCI状态。
例如:在CJT场景中,网络指示了4个unified TCI state(joint unified TCI state or DL unified TCI state),并从中确定前2个为预设TCI state,此时,网络侧设备可以指示这2个TCI state中的某一个或两个,作为CORESET的TCI state;或者指示这两个TCI state分别对应两个CORESET组。
在另一种可能的实现方式中,对于配置为多波束同时传输模式(如SFN)的CORESET或CORESET group或search space set(共需P个TCI state,P为正整数),当M1/M2大于P时,总是使用P个预设TCI state(如前P个),作为目标TCI state。
在另一种可能的实现方式中,当预设CORESET或CORESET group或search space set的目标TCI state关联的第三标识,与该预设CORESET或CORESET group或search space set的原TCI state关联的第二标识不同时,则可以执行以下调整:
1h)将预设CORESET或CORESET group或search space set切换为与第三标识关联;
2h)将预设CORESET或CORESET group或search space set切换至通过第三标识关联的小区或TRP传输;
3h)执行小区或TRP切换,例如:第二标识对应的波束位于第一PCI,第三标识对应的波束位于第二PCI,则将本小区(或服务小区)切换为所述第二PCI。
例如:假设某一CORESET原有TCI state1,网络指示了其更新为TCI state2,且TCI state1关联了PCI1,TCI state2关联了PCI2,则可以:将CORESET由当前配置在PCI1更新为配置在PCI2,或者,将CORESET上的PDCCH从PCI1切换至PCI2或者,将CORESET上的PDCCH从PCI1对应的TRP1切换至PCI2对应的TRP2发送,或者执行从PCI1到PCI2的小区切换。
场景四、根据指示的unified TCI state,确定PDSCH的目标TCI state。
在所述目标信道包括所述第一DCI调度的PDSCH的情况下,所述第一DCI的目标指示域(如第三field)指示用于所述PDSCH的第一TCI状态和/或,所述第一DCI的目标指示域指示所述PDSCH的至少两个标识信息与至少两个第一TCI状态之间的对应关系。
其中,上述第一DCI的目标指示域(即第三field)指示的第一TCI状态可以是M个第一TCI状态中的任意TCI状态。例如:对于PDSCH,第一DCI中的第三field,可以指示在M1/M2个TCI state中的用于PDSCH的TCI state。如:网络指示了共4个第一TCI状态,第三field指示了其中第一个第一TCI状态用于PDSCH,或者,网络指示了共4个第一TCI状态,第三field指示了其中第一个和第三个第一TCI状态用于PDSCH。
当然,在实施中,还可以先从M个第一TCI状态中确定N个预设TCI状态,然后利用上述第一DCI的目标指示域指示N个预设TCI状态中的任意TCI状态。例如:根据网络指示或协议约定从M1/M2个TCI state中选择N个预设TCI state,然后,利用第一DCI中的第三field指示了在N个预设TCI state中的用于PDSCH的目标TCI state。
此外,第三field在指示用于PDSCH的至少两个第一TCI状态的同时,还可以指示PDSCH的至少两个标识信息与至少两个第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以明确PDSCH的各个标识信息与第一TCI状态之间的对应关系。
例如:第一DCI中的第三field还能指示用于PDSCH的TCI state的顺序。其中,该顺序可用于确定PDSCH的多个DMRS组、DMRS端口、频域资源、多个layer的TCI state。
作为一种可选的实施方式,所述PDSCH的至少两个标识信息与至少两个第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,包括以下至少一项:
所述第一TCI状态与所述PDSCH的第四信息之间的对应关系,所述第四信息包括:DMRS组、DMRS端口、频域资源和层中的至少一项;
所述第一TCI状态的排列顺序与第一排列顺序之间的对应关系,所述第一排列顺序包括以下至少一项:
所述PDSCH的DMRS组的排列顺序;
所述PDSCH的DMRS组的奇偶顺序;
所述PDSCH的DMRS端口的排列顺序;
所述PDSCH的DMRS端口的奇偶顺序;
所述PDSCH的频域资源的排列顺序;
所述PDSCH的频域资源的奇偶顺序;
所述PDSCH的层的排列顺序;
所述PDSCH的层的奇偶顺序。
其中,上述TCI state的顺序和PDSCH的多个DMRS组、DMRS端口、频域资源、多个layer的对应关系可以是网络侧设备指示的,或者是协议中预先约定的。
本实施方式中,按照TCI state的排列顺序与PDSCH的第四信息的顺序进行对应,根据TCI state的排列顺序与PDSCH的第四信息的顺序(如DMRS group ID或频域资源从低到高、DMRS group ID或频域资源(PRB)或layer从奇到偶的顺序、layer从低到高的顺序等)对应,如:排列于第一位的TCI state与取值最小的DMRS group ID对应。
场景五、根据指示的unified TCI state,确定PUSCH的目标TCI state。
在所述目标信道包括所述第一DCI调度的PUSCH的情况下,所述第一DCI的目标指示域指示用于所述PUSCH的第一TCI状态和/或,所述第一DCI的目标指示域指示所述PUSCH的至少两个标识信息与至少两个第一TCI状态之间的对应关系。
可选地,所述PUSCH的至少两个标识信息与至少两个第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,包括以下至少一项:
所述第一TCI状态与所述PUSCH的第四信息之间的对应关系,所述第四信息包括:DMRS组、DMRS端口、频域资源和层中的至少一项;
所述第一TCI状态的排列顺序与第一排列顺序之间的对应关系,所述第一排列顺序包括以下至少一项:
所述PUSCH的DMRS组的排列顺序;
所述PUSCH的DMRS组的奇偶顺序;
所述PUSCH的DMRS端口的排列顺序;
所述PUSCH的DMRS端口的奇偶顺序;
所述PUSCH的频域资源的排列顺序;
所述PUSCH的频域资源的奇偶顺序;
所述PUSCH的层的排列顺序;
所述PUSCH的层的奇偶顺序。
上述根据指示的unified TCI state,确定PUSCH的目标TCI state的具体过程,可以参考场景四中,根据指示的unified TCI state,确定PDSCH的目标TCI state的具体过程,在此不再赘述。
此外,当配置了CJT的下行传输模式下,且指示了M1(M1>2)个joint TCI state或M2(M2>2)个separate DL TCI state,上行传输(也可以包括SRS resource set、PUCCH resource、PUSCH)使用所述M1个joint TCI state中的1个或2个TCI state,或使用所述M2个separate DL TCI state对应的separate UL TCI state中的1个或2个UL TCI state。例如:可以使用网络配置指示的1个或2个TCI state,或者使用M1个joint TCI state中的前1个或2个,或者使用M2个separate DL TCI state对应的separate UL TCI state中的前1个或2个,具体可以参考场景三中PDCCH使用的TCI状态的确定过程,在此不再赘述。
在本申请实施例中,终端获取网络侧设备指示的公共波束信息,其中,所述公共波束信息包括M个第一TCI状态,M为正整数;所述终端从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态;其中,所述目标信道,包括:物理上行控制信道PUCCH、物理下行控制信道PDCCH、物理下行共享信道PDSCH和物理上行共享信道PUSCH中的至少一项;或者,所述目标信号包括:探测参考信号SRS和信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS中的至少一项。这样,PUCCH、PDCCH、PDSCH、PUSCH、SRS和CSI-RS能够共用网络侧设备指示的M个第一TCI状态,通过为不同的信道和/或信号指示共用的TCI状态,降低了波束指示的复杂程度。
请参阅图3,本申请实施例提供的另一种TCI状态确定方法,该方法与如图2所示方法实施例的最大区别在于,如图2所示方法实施例的执行主体是终端,而如图3所示方法实施例的执行主体是网络侧设备,且该网络侧设备执行的各个步骤与如图2所示方法实施例中终端执行的各个步骤相同或者相对应,因此,如图3所示方法实施例中的各项解释和说明可以参考如图2所示方法实施例中的对应解释,在此不再赘述。
如图3所示,该能够应用于网络侧设备的TCI状态确定方法可以包括以下步骤:
步骤301、网络侧设备向终端指示公共波束信息,其中,所述公共波束信息包括M个第一TCI状态,M为正整数.
步骤302、所述网络侧设备从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态;其中,所述目标信道,包括:物理上行控制信道PUCCH、物理下行控制信道PDCCH、物理下行共享信道PDSCH和物理上行共享信道PUSCH中的至少一项;或者,所述目标信号包括:探测参考信号SRS和信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS中的至少一项。
作为一种可选的实施方式,所述网络侧设备从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道或目标信号的目标TCI状态,包括:
所述网络侧设备根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,其中,所述目标信息包括以下至少一项:
所述第一TCI状态的数量;
所述第一TCI状态与第一标识信息之间的对应关系,所述第一标识信息用于标识所述目标信道和/或所述目标信号中的至少一个;
所述目标信道和/或目标信号所对应的第一标识信息的数量;
所述目标信道和/或目标信号对应的第一标识信息的值;
所述M个第一TCI状态的排列顺序或位置;
所述目标信道和/或目标信号所对应的第一标识信息的排列顺序;
所述目标信道和/或目标信号的类型;
所述目标信道和/或目标信号的传输模式;
所述目标信道和/或目标信号的时域行为;
第一信息或第二信息,所述第一信息表示第一下行控制信息DCI调度了PUSCH或PDSCH,所述第二信息表示第一DCI未调度PUSCH或PDSCH,所述第一DCI用于触发所述目标信号或者调度所述目标信道;
所述第一DCI的目标指示域,所述目标指示域用于指示所述M个第一TCI状态中的至少一个;
N个预设TCI状态,所述公共波束信息包括所述N个预设TCI状态,N为小于或者等于M的正整数;
所述N个预设TCI状态与所述第一标识信息之间的对应关系。
作为一种可选的实施方式,所述第一标识信息包括以下至少一项:
SRS资源集标识信息;
SRS资源标识信息;
信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS资源集标识信息;
CSI-RS资源组标识信息;
CSI-RS资源标识信息;
控制资源集CORESET组标识信息;
CORESET标识信息;
搜索空间集标识信息;
所述目标信道的解调参考信号DMRS组标识信息;
所述目标信道的DMRS端口标识信息;
所述目标信道的频域资源标识信息;
所述目标信道的层标识信息。
作为一种可选的实施方式,所述第一TCI状态与第一标识信息之间的对应关系包括以下至少一项:
所述M个第一TCI状态的排列位置与所述第一标识信息的排列位置之间的对应关系;
所述网络侧设备指示的所述第一TCI状态与所述第一标识信息之间的对应关系。
作为一种可选的实施方式,在所述目标信道和/或目标信号的传输模式为相干联合传输CJT模式的情况下,M为大于2的整数。
作为一种可选的实施方式,所述TCI确定方法还包括:
所述网络侧设备根据第三信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定所述N个预设TCI状态,其中,所述第三信息由网络侧设备指示或者由协议约定;
所述网络侧设备根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,包括:
所述网络侧设备根据目标信息,从所述N个预设TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态。
作为一种可选的实施方式,在所述第一DCI用于调度PUSCH的情况下,
所述目标指示域指示所述第一DCI调度的PUSCH的TCI状态,所述M个第一TCI状态包括所述第一DCI调度的PUSCH的TCI状态;
所述网络侧设备根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,包括:
所述网络侧设备确定目标信号的目标TCI状态包括所述目标指示域所指示的TCI状态,所述目标信号包括以下至少一项:
所述终端需要发送的SRS资源集中的SRS,其中,所述终端需要发送的SRS资源集根据所述第一DCI触发的SRS资源集标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;
所述终端需要发送的SRS资源中的SRS,其中,所述终端需要发送的SRS资源根据所述第一DCI触发的SRS资源标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述第一DCI的目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;
所述第一DCI触发的全部SRS资源集或SRS资源中的SRS。
作为一种可选的实施方式,在所述第一DCI用于调度PUSCH的情况下,所述目标指示域指示所述第一DCI调度的PUSCH的TCI状态,所述M个第一TCI状态包括与第二TCI状态对应相同码点的TCI状态和所述第二TCI状态,所述第二TCI状态包括所述第一DCI调度的PUSCH的TCI状态;
所述网络侧设备根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,包括:
所述网络侧设备确定目标信号的目标TCI状态包括与所述第二TCI状态对应相同码点的TCI状态或所述第二TCI状态,所述目标信号包括以下至少一项:
所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源集中的CSI-RS,其中,所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源集根据所述第一DCI触发的CSI-RS资源集标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;
所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源组中的CSI-RS,其中,所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源组根据所述第一DCI触发的CSI-RS资源组标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述第一DCI的目标指示域所指示的
TCI状态确定;
所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源中的CSI-RS,其中,所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源根据所述第一DCI触发的CSI-RS资源标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述第一DCI的目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;
所述第一DCI触发的全部CSI-RS资源集或或CSI-RS资源组或CSI-RS资源中的CSI-RS。
作为一种可选的实施方式,在所述第一DCI用于调度PDSCH的情况下,所述目标指示域指示所述第一DCI调度的PDSCH的TCI状态,所述M个第一TCI状态包括所述第一DCI调度的PDSCH的TCI状态;
所述网络侧设备根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,包括:
所述网络侧设备确定目标信号的目标TCI状态包括所述目标指示域所指示的TCI状态,所述目标信号包括以下至少一项:
所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源集中的CSI-RS,其中,所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源集根据所述第一DCI触发的CSI-RS资源集标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;
所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源组中的CSI-RS,其中,所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源组根据所述第一DCI触发的CSI-RS资源组标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述第一DCI的目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;
所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源中的CSI-RS,其中,所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源根据所述第一DCI触发的CSI-RS资源标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述第一DCI的目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;
所述第一DCI触发的全部CSI-RS资源集或或CSI-RS资源组或CSI-RS资源中的CSI-RS。
作为一种可选的实施方式,在所述第一DCI用于调度PDSCH的情况下,
所述目标指示域指示所述第一DCI调度的PDSCH的TCI状态,所述M个第一TCI状态包括与第三TCI状态对应相同码点的TCI状态和所述第三TCI状态,所述第三TCI状态包括所述第一DCI调度的PDSCH的TCI状态;
所述网络侧设备根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,包括:
所述网络侧设备确定目标信号的目标TCI状态包括与所述第三TCI状态对应相同码点的TCI状态或所述第三TCI状态,所述目标信号包括以下至少一项:
所述终端需要发送的SRS资源集中的SRS,其中,所述终端需要发送的SRS资源集根据所述第一DCI触发的SRS资源集标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;
所述终端需要发送的SRS资源中的SRS,其中,所述终端需要发送的SRS资源根据所述第一DCI触发的SRS资源标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述第一DCI的目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;
所述第一DCI触发的全部SRS资源集或SRS资源中的SRS。
作为一种可选的实施方式,m为所述M个第一TCI状态或所述N个预设TCI状态包括的适用于所述目标信道和/或目标信号的第一TCI状态的数量,K为所述目标信道和/或目标信号所对应的第一标识信息的数量;
所述网络侧设备根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,包括:
在m等于K的情况下,所述网络侧设备确定所述目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态包括所述m个第一TCI状态;和/或,
在m大于K的情况下,所述网络侧设备将所述m个第一TCI状态中的,且位于预设位置或所述网络侧设备向所述终端发送的第一指示信息所指示的K个TCI状态,确定为目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态;和/或,
在m小于K的情况下,所述网络侧设备将所述m个第一TCI状态,确定为m个第一标识信息对应的目标信道和/或目标信号的TCI状态,所述m个第一标识信息为所述K个第一标识信息中的,且排列于预设位置或所述网络侧设备向所述终端发送的第二指示信息所指示的m个第一标识信息;和/
或,
所述网络侧设备确定所述目标TCI状态包括所述m个第一TCI状态和所述目标信道和/或目标信号原有的(K-m)个TCI状态。
作为一种可选的实施方式,在所述目标信号包括SRS,且所述SRS的周期行为是非周期性的情况下,所述网络侧设备根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,包括:
若第一DCI用于触发K个SRS资源集,所述第一DCI未调度PDSCH或PUSCH,且所述第一DCI的目标指示域指示K个第一TCI状态,则所述网络侧设备根据所述K个SRS资源集与所述K个第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,确定所述K个SRS资源集中的每一个SRS资源集的TCI状态,其中,所述目标TCI状态包括所述K个第一TCI状态,K为正整数;和/或,
若第一DCI用于触发K个SRS资源集,所述第一DCI未调度PDSCH或PUSCH,且所述第一DCI的目标指示域指示X个第一TCI状态,则所述网络侧设备根据所述K个SRS资源集与所述X个第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,确定所述K个SRS资源集中的每一个SRS资源的TCI状态,其中,所述目标信道和/或目标信号包括所述K个SRS资源集,所述目标TCI状态包括所述X个第一TCI状态,其中,X表示所述K个SRS资源集包括的SRS资源的总数,X为正整数。
作为一种可选的实施方式,在所述目标信号包括CSI-RS,且所述CSI-RS的周期行为是非周期性的情况下,所述网络侧设备根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,包括:
若第一DCI用于触发K个CSI-RS资源集,所述第一DCI未调度PDSCH或PUSCH,且所述第一DCI的目标指示域指示K个第一TCI状态,则所述网络侧设备根据所述K个CSI-RS资源集与所述K个第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,确定所述K个CSI-RS资源集中的每一个CSI-RS资源集的TCI状态,其中,所述目标TCI状态包括所述K个第一TCI状态,K为正整数;和/或,
若第一DCI用于触发K个CSI-RS资源集,所述第一DCI未调度PDSCH或PUSCH,且所述第一DCI的目标指示域指示X个第一TCI状态,则所述网络侧设备根据所述K个CSI-RS资源集与所述X个第一TCI状态之间的对
应关系,确定所述K个CSI-RS资源集中的每一个CSI-RS资源组的TCI状态,其中,所述目标TCI状态包括所述X个第一TCI状态,其中,X表示所述K个CSI-RS资源集包括的CSI-RS资源组的总数,X为正整数;和/或,
若第一DCI用于触发K个CSI-RS资源集,所述第一DCI未调度PDSCH或PUSCH,且所述第一DCI的目标指示域指示H个第一TCI状态,则所述网络侧设备根据所述K个CSI-RS资源集与所述H个第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,确定所述K个CSI-RS资源集中的每一个CSI-RS资源的TCI状态,其中,所述目标TCI状态包括所述H个第一TCI状态,其中,H表示所述K个CSI-RS资源集所包含的CSI-RS资源组中的CSI-RS资源的总数,H为正整数。
作为一种可选的实施方式,在所述目标信道包括PDCCH的情况下,所述网络侧设备根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,包括:
所述网络侧设备根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定所述PDCCH对应的预设CORESET或预设CORESET组或预设搜索空间集的目标TCI状态;
在所述预设CORESET或预设CORESET组或预设搜索空间集原有的TCI状态关联第二标识,且所述预设CORESET或预设CORESET组或预设搜索空间集的目标TCI状态关联第三标识,所述第二标识和所述第三标识用于标识目标资源的情况下,所述方法还包括:
所述网络侧设备将所述预设CORESET或预设CORESET组或预设搜索空间集切换为与所述第三标识关联;或者,
所述网络侧设备将所述预设CORESET或预设CORESET组或预设搜索空间集切换为通过所述第三标识关联的目标资源传输;或者,
所述网络侧设备确定所述终端由所述第二标识关联的目标资源切换至所述第三标识关联的目标资源。
作为一种可选的实施方式,所述目标资源包括以下至少一项:
小区标识、物理小区标识、带宽部分BWP标识、发送接收点TRP标识、公共TCI状态池标识、公共TCI状态类型值、CORESET组标识、CORESET
标识、信道组标识、CORESET池标识、搜索空间集标识、搜索空间ID、同步信号块SSB ID,SSB组ID。
作为一种可选的实施方式,在所述目标信道包括所述第一DCI调度的PDSCH或PUSCH的情况下,所述第一DCI的目标指示域指示用于所述PDSCH或PUSCH的第一TCI状态和/或,所述第一DCI的目标指示域指示所述PDSCH或PUSCH的至少两个标识信息与至少两个第一TCI状态之间的对应关系。
作为一种可选的实施方式,所述PDSCH或PUSCH的至少两个标识信息与至少两个第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,包括以下至少一项:
所述第一TCI状态与所述PDSCH或PUSCH的第四信息之间的对应关系,所述第四信息包括:DMRS组、DMRS端口、频域资源和层中的至少一项;
所述第一TCI状态的排列顺序与第一排列顺序之间的对应关系,所述第一排列顺序包括以下至少一项:
所述PDSCH或PUSCH的DMRS组的排列顺序;
所述PDSCH或PUSCH的DMRS组的奇偶顺序;
所述PDSCH或PUSCH的DMRS端口的排列顺序;
所述PDSCH或PUSCH的DMRS端口的奇偶顺序;
所述PDSCH或PUSCH的频域资源的排列顺序;
所述PDSCH或PUSCH的频域资源的奇偶顺序;
所述PDSCH或PUSCH的层的排列顺序;
所述PDSCH或PUSCH的层的奇偶顺序。
作为一种可选的实施方式,在M等于1的情况下,所述网络侧设备从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,包括:
所述网络侧设备根据所述1个第一TCI状态更新所述目标信道和/或目标信号原有的TCI状态中的第一预设TCI状态,得到所述目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,所述第一预设TCI状态为所述目标信道和/或目标信号原有的TCI状态中的一个;或者,
所述网络侧设备确定所述目标信道和/或目标信号基于所述1个第一TCI状态进行单波束或单TRP传输;或者,
所述网络侧设备确定所述目标信道和/或目标信号共用所述1个第一TCI状态。
作为一种可选的实施方式,所述网络侧设备确定所述目标信道和/或目标信号基于所述1个第一TCI状态进行单波束或单TRP传输,包括:
所述网络侧设备确定所述终端需要传输的目标信道和/或目标信号包括与所述1个第一TCI状态关联的目标信道和/或目标信号;或者,
所述网络侧设备确定所述终端需要传输的目标信道和/或目标信号包括与所述1个第一TCI状态对应的目标资源相关联的目标信道和/或目标信号;
其中,所述目标资源包括以下至少一项:
小区标识、物理小区标识、带宽部分BWP标识、发送接收点TRP标识、公共TCI状态池标识、公共TCI状态类型值、CORESET组标识、CORESET标识、信道组标识、CORESET池标识、搜索空间集标识、搜索空间ID、同步信号块SSB ID,SSB组ID。
作为一种可选的实施方式,所述M个第一TCI状态包括以下至少一项:M1个联合TCI状态、M2个独立下行链路DL TCI状态以及M3个独立上行链路UL TCI状态。
本申请实施例中,提出了可在mTRP场景中应用的unified TCI framework方案,能够根据网络侧设备指示的unified TCI状态(即第一TCI状态),确定在各种传输模式下的目标信道或目标信号的波束信息,从而保证网络侧设备和终端之间对所用波束的理解一致。
本申请实施例提供的TCI状态确定方法,执行主体可以为TCI状态确定装置。本申请实施例中以TCI状态确定装置执行TCI状态确定方法为例,说明本申请实施例提供的TCI状态确定装置。
在一种实施方式中,若TCI状态确定装置应用于终端,则如图4所示,该TCI状态确定装置400可以包括以下模块:
获取模块401,用于获取网络侧设备指示的公共波束信息,其中,所述公共波束信息包括M个第一TCI状态,M为正整数;
第一确定模块402,用于从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态;
其中,所述目标信道,包括:物理上行控制信道PUCCH、物理下行控制信道PDCCH、物理下行共享信道PDSCH和物理上行共享信道PUSCH中的至少一项;或者,所述目标信号包括:探测参考信号SRS和信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS中的至少一项。
可选地,第一确定模块402,具体用于:
根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,其中,所述目标信息包括以下至少一项:
所述第一TCI状态的数量;
所述第一TCI状态与第一标识信息之间的对应关系,所述第一标识信息用于标识所述目标信道和/或所述目标信号中的至少一个;
所述目标信道和/或目标信号所对应的第一标识信息的数量;
所述目标信道和/或目标信号对应的第一标识信息的值;
所述M个第一TCI状态的排列顺序或位置;
所述目标信道和/或目标信号所对应的第一标识信息的排列顺序;
所述目标信道和/或目标信号的类型;
所述目标信道和/或目标信号的传输模式;
所述目标信道和/或目标信号的时域行为;
第一信息或第二信息,所述第一信息表示第一下行控制信息DCI调度了PUSCH或PDSCH,所述第二信息表示第一DCI未调度PUSCH或PDSCH,所述第一DCI用于触发所述目标信号或者调度所述目标信道;
所述第一DCI的目标指示域,所述目标指示域用于指示所述M个第一TCI状态中的至少一个;
N个预设TCI状态,所述公共波束信息包括所述N个预设TCI状态,N为小于或者等于M的正整数;
所述N个预设TCI状态与所述第一标识信息之间的对应关系。
可选地,所述第一标识信息包括以下至少一项:
SRS资源集标识信息;
SRS资源标识信息;
信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS资源集标识信息;
CSI-RS资源组标识信息;
CSI-RS资源标识信息;
控制资源集CORESET组标识信息;
CORESET标识信息;
搜索空间集标识信息;
所述目标信道的解调参考信号DMRS组标识信息;
所述目标信道的DMRS端口标识信息;
所述目标信道的频域资源标识信息;
所述目标信道的层标识信息。
可选地,所述第一TCI状态与第一标识信息之间的对应关系包括以下至少一项:
所述M个第一TCI状态的排列位置与所述第一标识信息的排列位置之间的对应关系;
网络侧设备指示的所述第一TCI状态与所述第一标识信息之间的对应关系。
可选地,在所述目标信道和/或目标信号的传输模式为相干联合传输CJT模式的情况下,M为大于2的整数。
可选地,TCI状态确定装置400还包括:
第三确定模块,用于根据第三信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定所述N个预设TCI状态,其中,所述第三信息由网络侧设备指示或者由协议约定;
第一确定模块402,具体用于:
根据目标信息,从所述N个预设TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态。
可选地,在所述第一DCI用于调度PUSCH的情况下,所述目标指示域指示所述第一DCI调度的PUSCH的TCI状态,所述M个第一TCI状态包括所述第一DCI调度的PUSCH的TCI状态;
第一确定模块402,具体用于:
确定目标信号的目标TCI状态包括所述目标指示域所指示的TCI状态,
所述目标信号包括以下至少一项:
所述终端需要发送的SRS资源集中的SRS,其中,所述终端需要发送的SRS资源集根据所述第一DCI触发的SRS资源集标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;
所述终端需要发送的SRS资源中的SRS,其中,所述终端需要发送的SRS资源根据所述第一DCI触发的SRS资源标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述第一DCI的目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;
所述第一DCI触发的全部SRS资源集或SRS资源中的SRS。
可选地,在所述第一DCI用于调度PUSCH的情况下,所述目标指示域指示所述第一DCI调度的PUSCH的TCI状态,所述M个第一TCI状态包括与第二TCI状态对应相同码点的TCI状态和所述第二TCI状态,所述第二TCI状态包括所述第一DCI调度的PUSCH的TCI状态;
第一确定模块402具体用于:
确定目标信号的目标TCI状态包括与所述第二TCI状态对应相同码点的TCI状态或所述第二TCI状态,其中,所述目标目标信号包括以下至少一项:
所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源集中的CSI-RS,其中,所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源集根据所述第一DCI触发的CSI-RS资源集标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;
所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源组中的CSI-RS,其中,所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源组根据所述第一DCI触发的CSI-RS资源组标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述第一DCI的目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;
所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源中的CSI-RS,其中,所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源根据所述第一DCI触发的CSI-RS资源标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述第一DCI的目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;
所述第一DCI触发的全部CSI-RS资源集或或CSI-RS资源组或CSI-RS资源中的CSI-RS。
可选地,在所述第一DCI用于调度PDSCH的情况下,所述目标指示域指示所述第一DCI调度的PDSCH的TCI状态,所述M个第一TCI状态包括所述第一DCI调度的PDSCH的TCI状态;
第一确定模块402具体用于:
确定目标信号的目标TCI状态包括所述目标指示域所指示的TCI状态,所述目标信号包括以下至少一项:
所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源集中的CSI-RS,其中,所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源集根据所述第一DCI触发的CSI-RS资源集标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;
所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源组中的CSI-RS,其中,所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源组根据所述第一DCI触发的CSI-RS资源组标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述第一DCI的目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;
所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源中的CSI-RS,其中,所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源根据所述第一DCI触发的CSI-RS资源标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述第一DCI的目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;
所述第一DCI触发的全部CSI-RS资源集或或CSI-RS资源组或CSI-RS资源中的CSI-RS。
可选地,在所述第一DCI用于调度PDSCH的情况下,所述目标指示域指示所述第一DCI调度的PDSCH的TCI状态,所述M个第一TCI状态包括与第三TCI状态对应相同码点的TCI状态和所述第三TCI状态,所述第三TCI状态包括所述第一DCI调度的PDSCH的TCI状态;
第一确定模块402具体用于:
确定目标信号的目标TCI状态包括与所述第三TCI状态对应相同码点的TCI状态或所述第三TCI状态,所述目标信号包括以下至少一项:
所述终端需要发送的SRS资源集中的SRS,其中,所述终端需要发送的SRS资源集根据所述第一DCI触发的SRS资源集标识信息与所述第一TCI
状态之间的对应关系,以及所述目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;
所述终端需要发送的SRS资源中的SRS,其中,所述终端需要发送的SRS资源根据所述第一DCI触发的SRS资源标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述第一DCI的目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;
所述第一DCI触发的全部SRS资源集或SRS资源中的SRS。
可选地,m为所述M个第一TCI状态或所述N个预设TCI状态包括的适用于所述目标信道和/或目标信号的第一TCI状态的数量,K为所述目标信道和/或目标信号所对应的第一标识信息的数量;
第一确定模块402具体用于:
在m等于K的情况下,确定所述目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态包括所述m个第一TCI状态;和/或,
在m大于K的情况下,将所述m个第一TCI状态中的,且位于预设位置或来自所述网络侧设备的第一指示信息所指示的K个TCI状态,确定为目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态;和/或,
在m小于K的情况下,将所述m个第一TCI状态,确定为m个第一标识信息对应的目标信道和/或目标信号的TCI状态,所述m个第一标识信息为所述K个第一标识信息中的,且排列于预设位置或来自所述网络侧设备的第二指示信息所指示的m个第一标识信息;和/或,
确定所述目标TCI状态包括所述m个第一TCI状态和所述目标信道和/或目标信号原有的(K-m)个TCI状态。
可选地,在所述目标信号包括SRS,且所述SRS的周期行为是非周期性的情况下,第一确定模块402具体用于:
若第一DCI用于触发K个SRS资源集,所述第一DCI未调度PDSCH或PUSCH,且所述第一DCI的目标指示域指示K个第一TCI状态,则根据所述K个SRS资源集与所述K个第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,确定所述K个SRS资源集中的每一个SRS资源集的TCI状态,其中,所述目标TCI状态包括所述K个第一TCI状态,K为正整数;和/或,
若第一DCI用于触发K个SRS资源集,所述第一DCI未调度PDSCH或PUSCH,且所述第一DCI的目标指示域指示X个第一TCI状态,则根据所
述K个SRS资源集与所述X个第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,确定所述K个SRS资源集中的每一个SRS资源的TCI状态,其中,所述目标信道和/或目标信号包括所述K个SRS资源集,所述目标TCI状态包括所述X个第一TCI状态,其中,X表示所述K个SRS资源集包括的SRS资源的总数,X为正整数。
可选地,在所述目标信号包括CSI-RS,且所述CSI-RS的周期行为是非周期性的情况下,第一确定模块402具体用于:
若第一DCI用于触发K个CSI-RS资源集,所述第一DCI未调度PDSCH或PUSCH,且所述第一DCI的目标指示域指示K个第一TCI状态,则根据所述K个CSI-RS资源集与所述K个第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,确定所述K个CSI-RS资源集中的每一个CSI-RS资源集的TCI状态,其中,所述目标TCI状态包括所述K个第一TCI状态,K为正整数;和/或,
若第一DCI用于触发K个CSI-RS资源集,所述第一DCI未调度PDSCH或PUSCH,且所述第一DCI的目标指示域指示X个第一TCI状态,则根据所述K个CSI-RS资源集与所述X个第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,确定所述K个CSI-RS资源集中的每一个CSI-RS资源组的TCI状态,其中,所述目标TCI状态包括所述X个第一TCI状态,其中,X表示所述K个CSI-RS资源集包括的CSI-RS资源组的总数,X为正整数;和/或,
若第一DCI用于触发K个CSI-RS资源集,所述第一DCI未调度PDSCH或PUSCH,且所述第一DCI的目标指示域指示H个第一TCI状态,则根据所述K个CSI-RS资源集与所述H个第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,确定所述K个CSI-RS资源集中的每一个CSI-RS资源的TCI状态,其中,所述目标TCI状态包括所述H个第一TCI状态,其中,H表示所述K个CSI-RS资源集所包含的CSI-RS资源组中的CSI-RS资源的总数,H为正整数。
可选地,在所述目标信道包括PDCCH的情况下,第一确定模块402具体用于:
根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定所述PDCCH对应的预设CORESET或预设CORESET组或预设搜索空间集的目标TCI状态;
在所述预设CORESET或预设CORESET组或预设搜索空间集原有的TCI
状态关联第二标识,且所述预设CORESET或预设CORESET组或预设搜索空间集的目标TCI状态关联第三标识,所述第二标识和所述第三标识用于标识目标资源的情况下,TCI状态确定装置400还包括:
第一关联模块,用于将所述预设CORESET或预设CORESET组或预设搜索空间集切换为与所述第三标识关联;或者,
第一切换模块,用于将所述预设CORESET或预设CORESET组或预设搜索空间集切换为通过所述第三标识关联的目标资源传输;或者,
第二切换模块,用于由所述第二标识关联的目标资源切换至所述第三标识关联的目标资源。
可选地,所述目标资源包括以下至少一项:
小区标识、物理小区标识、带宽部分BWP标识、发送接收点TRP标识、公共TCI状态池标识、公共TCI状态类型值、CORESET组标识、CORESET标识、信道组标识、CORESET池标识、搜索空间集标识、搜索空间ID、同步信号块SSB ID,SSB组ID。
可选地,在所述目标信道包括所述第一DCI调度的PDSCH或PUSCH的情况下,所述第一DCI的目标指示域指示用于所述PDSCH或PUSCH的第一TCI状态和/或,所述第一DCI的目标指示域指示所述PDSCH或PUSCH的至少两个标识信息与至少两个第一TCI状态之间的对应关系。
可选地,所述PDSCH或PUSCH的至少两个标识信息与至少两个第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,包括以下至少一项:
所述第一TCI状态与所述PDSCH或PUSCH的第四信息之间的对应关系,所述第四信息包括:DMRS组、DMRS端口、频域资源和层中的至少一项;
所述第一TCI状态的排列顺序与第一排列顺序之间的对应关系,所述第一排列顺序包括以下至少一项:
所述PDSCH或PUSCH的DMRS组的排列顺序;
所述PDSCH或PUSCH的DMRS组的奇偶顺序;
所述PDSCH或PUSCH的DMRS端口的排列顺序;
所述PDSCH或PUSCH的DMRS端口的奇偶顺序;
所述PDSCH或PUSCH的频域资源的排列顺序;
所述PDSCH或PUSCH的频域资源的奇偶顺序;
所述PDSCH或PUSCH的层的排列顺序;
所述PDSCH或PUSCH的层的奇偶顺序。
可选地,在M等于1的情况下,第一确定模块402具体用于:
根据所述1个第一TCI状态更新所述目标信道和/或目标信号原有的TCI状态中的第一预设TCI状态,得到所述目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,所述第一预设TCI状态为所述目标信道和/或目标信号原有的TCI状态中的一个;或者,
确定所述目标信道或目标信号基于所述1个第一TCI状态进行单波束或单TRP传输;或者,
确定所述目标信道和/或目标信号共用所述1个第一TCI状态。
可选地,第一确定模块402,包括:
第一确定单元,用于确定需要传输的目标信道和/或目标信号包括与所述1个第一TCI状态关联的目标信道和/或目标信号;或者,
第二确定单元,用于确定需要传输的目标信道和/或目标信号包括与所述1个第一TCI状态对应的目标资源相关联的目标信道和/或目标信号;
其中,所述目标资源包括以下至少一项:
小区标识、物理小区标识、带宽部分BWP标识、发送接收点TRP标识、公共TCI状态池标识、公共TCI状态类型值、CORESET组标识、CORESET标识、信道组标识、CORESET池标识、搜索空间集标识、搜索空间ID、同步信号块SSB ID,SSB组ID。
可选地,所述M个第一TCI状态包括以下至少一项:M1个联合TCI状态、M2个独立下行链路DL TCI状态以及M3个独立上行链路UL TCI状态。
本申请实施例中的TCI状态确定装置400可以是电子设备,例如具有操作***的电子设备,也可以是电子设备中的部件,例如集成电路或芯片。该电子设备可以是终端,也可以为除终端之外的其他设备。示例性的,终端可以包括但不限于上述所列举的终端11的类型,其他设备可以为服务器、网络附属存储器(Network Attached Storage,NAS)等,本申请实施例不作具体限定。
本实施方式提供的TCI状态确定装置400能够实现如图2所示方法实施例中的各个过程,且能够取得相同的有益效果,为避免重复,在此不再赘述。
在另一种实施方式中,若TCI状态确定装置应用于网络侧设备,则如图5所示,该TCI状态确定装置500可以包括以下模块:
第一发送模块501,用于向终端指示公共波束信息,其中,所述公共波束信息包括M个第一TCI状态,M为正整数;
第二确定模块502,用于从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态;
其中,所述目标信道,包括:物理上行控制信道PUCCH、物理下行控制信道PDCCH、物理下行共享信道PDSCH和物理上行共享信道PUSCH中的至少一项;或者,所述目标信号包括:探测参考信号SRS和信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS中的至少一项。
可选地,第二确定模块502具体用于:
根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,其中,所述目标信息包括以下至少一项:
所述第一TCI状态的数量;
所述第一TCI状态与第一标识信息之间的对应关系,所述第一标识信息用于标识所述目标信道和/或所述目标信号中的至少一个;
所述目标信道和/或目标信号所对应的第一标识信息的数量;
所述目标信道和/或目标信号对应的第一标识信息的值;
所述M个第一TCI状态的排列顺序或位置;
所述目标信道和/或目标信号所对应的第一标识信息的排列顺序;
所述目标信道和/或目标信号的类型;
所述目标信道和/或目标信号的传输模式;
所述目标信道和/或目标信号的时域行为;
第一信息或第二信息,所述第一信息表示第一下行控制信息DCI调度了PUSCH或PDSCH,所述第二信息表示第一DCI未调度PUSCH或PDSCH,所述第一DCI用于触发所述目标信号或者调度所述目标信道;
所述第一DCI的目标指示域,所述目标指示域用于指示所述M个第一
TCI状态中的至少一个;
N个预设TCI状态,所述公共波束信息包括所述N个预设TCI状态,N为小于或者等于M的正整数;
所述N个预设TCI状态与所述第一标识信息之间的对应关系。
可选地,所述第一标识信息包括以下至少一项:
SRS资源集标识信息;
SRS资源标识信息;
信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS资源集标识信息;
CSI-RS资源组标识信息;
CSI-RS资源标识信息;
控制资源集CORESET组标识信息;
CORESET标识信息;
搜索空间集标识信息;
所述目标信道的解调参考信号DMRS组标识信息;
所述目标信道的DMRS端口标识信息;
所述目标信道的频域资源标识信息;
所述目标信道的层标识信息。
可选地,所述第一TCI状态与第一标识信息之间的对应关系包括以下至少一项:
所述M个第一TCI状态的排列位置与所述第一标识信息的排列位置之间的对应关系;
所述网络侧设备指示的所述第一TCI状态与所述第一标识信息之间的对应关系。
可选地,在所述目标信道和/或目标信号的传输模式为相干联合传输CJT模式的情况下,M为大于2的整数。
可选地,TCI状态确定装置500还包括:
第四确定模块,用于根据第三信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定所述N个预设TCI状态,其中,所述第三信息由网络侧设备指示或者由协议约定;
第二确定模块502具体用于:
根据目标信息,从所述N个预设TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态。
可选地,在所述第一DCI用于调度PUSCH的情况下,所述目标指示域指示所述第一DCI调度的PUSCH的TCI状态,所述M个第一TCI状态包括所述第一DCI调度的PUSCH的TCI状态;
第二确定模块502具体用于:
确定目标信号的目标TCI状态包括所述目标指示域所指示的TCI状态,所述目标信号包括以下至少一项:
所述终端需要发送的SRS资源集中的SRS,其中,所述终端需要发送的SRS资源集根据所述第一DCI触发的SRS资源集标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;
所述终端需要发送的SRS资源中的SRS,其中,所述终端需要发送的SRS资源根据所述第一DCI触发的SRS资源标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述第一DCI的目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;
所述第一DCI触发的全部SRS资源集或SRS资源中的SRS。
可选地,在所述第一DCI用于调度PUSCH的情况下,所述目标指示域指示所述第一DCI调度的PUSCH的TCI状态,所述M个第一TCI状态包括与第二TCI状态对应相同码点的TCI状态和所述第二TCI状态,所述第二TCI状态包括所述第一DCI调度的PUSCH的TCI状态;
第二确定模块502具体用于:
确定目标信号的目标TCI状态包括与所述第二TCI状态对应相同码点的TCI状态或所述第二TCI状态,所述目标信号包括以下至少一项:
所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源集中的CSI-RS,其中,所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源集根据所述第一DCI触发的CSI-RS资源集标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;
所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源组中的CSI-RS,其中,所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源组根据所述第一DCI触发的CSI-RS资源组标识信息与所
述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述第一DCI的目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;
所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源中的CSI-RS,其中,所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源根据所述第一DCI触发的CSI-RS资源标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述第一DCI的目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;
所述第一DCI触发的全部CSI-RS资源集或或CSI-RS资源组或CSI-RS资源中的CSI-RS。
可选地,在所述第一DCI用于调度PDSCH的情况下,所述目标指示域指示所述第一DCI调度的PDSCH的TCI状态,所述M个第一TCI状态包括所述第一DCI调度的PDSCH的TCI状态;
第二确定模块502具体用于:
确定目标信号的目标TCI状态包括所述目标指示域所指示的TCI状态,所述目标信号包括以下至少一项:
所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源集中的CSI-RS,其中,所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源集根据所述第一DCI触发的CSI-RS资源集标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;
所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源组中的CSI-RS,其中,所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源组根据所述第一DCI触发的CSI-RS资源组标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述第一DCI的目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;
所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源中的CSI-RS,其中,所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源根据所述第一DCI触发的CSI-RS资源标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述第一DCI的目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;
所述第一DCI触发的全部CSI-RS资源集或或CSI-RS资源组或CSI-RS资源中的CSI-RS。
可选地,在所述第一DCI用于调度PDSCH的情况下,所述目标指示域
指示所述第一DCI调度的PDSCH的TCI状态,所述M个第一TCI状态包括与第三TCI状态对应相同码点的TCI状态和所述第三TCI状态,所述第三TCI状态包括所述第一DCI调度的PDSCH的TCI状态;
第二确定模块502具体用于:
确定目标信号的目标TCI状态包括与所述第三TCI状态对应相同码点的TCI状态或所述第三TCI状态,所述目标信号包括以下至少一项:
所述终端需要发送的SRS资源集中的SRS,其中,所述终端需要发送的SRS资源集根据所述第一DCI触发的SRS资源集标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;
所述终端需要发送的SRS资源中的SRS,其中,所述终端需要发送的SRS资源根据所述第一DCI触发的SRS资源标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述第一DCI的目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;
所述第一DCI触发的全部SRS资源集或SRS资源中的SRS。
可选地,m为所述M个第一TCI状态或所述N个预设TCI状态包括的适用于所述目标信道和/或目标信号的第一TCI状态的数量,K为所述目标信道和/或目标信号所对应的第一标识信息的数量;
第二确定模块502具体用于:
在m等于K的情况下,确定所述目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态包括所述m个第一TCI状态;和/或,
在m大于K的情况下,将所述m个第一TCI状态中的,且位于预设位置或所述网络侧设备向所述终端发送的第一指示信息所指示的K个TCI状态,确定为目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态;和/或,
在m小于K的情况下,将所述m个第一TCI状态,确定为m个第一标识信息对应的目标信道和/或目标信号的TCI状态,所述m个第一标识信息为所述K个第一标识信息中的,且排列于预设位置或所述网络侧设备向所述终端发送的第二指示信息所指示的m个第一标识信息;和/或,
确定所述目标TCI状态包括所述m个第一TCI状态和所述目标信道和/或目标信号原有的(K-m)个TCI状态。
可选地,在所述目标信号包括SRS,且所述SRS的周期行为是非周期性
的情况下,第二确定模块502具体用于:
若第一DCI用于触发K个SRS资源集,所述第一DCI未调度PDSCH或PUSCH,且所述第一DCI的目标指示域指示K个第一TCI状态,则根据所述K个SRS资源集与所述K个第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,确定所述K个SRS资源集中的每一个SRS资源集的TCI状态,其中,所述目标TCI状态包括所述K个第一TCI状态,K为正整数;和/或,
若第一DCI用于触发K个SRS资源集,所述第一DCI未调度PDSCH或PUSCH,且所述第一DCI的目标指示域指示X个第一TCI状态,则根据所述K个SRS资源集与所述X个第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,确定所述K个SRS资源集中的每一个SRS资源的TCI状态,其中,所述目标信道和/或目标信号包括所述K个SRS资源集,所述目标TCI状态包括所述X个第一TCI状态,其中,X表示所述K个SRS资源集包括的SRS资源的总数,X为正整数。
可选地,在所述目标信号包括CSI-RS,且所述CSI-RS的周期行为是非周期性的情况下,第二确定模块502具体用于:
若第一DCI用于触发K个CSI-RS资源集,所述第一DCI未调度PDSCH或PUSCH,且所述第一DCI的目标指示域指示K个第一TCI状态,则根据所述K个CSI-RS资源集与所述K个第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,确定所述K个CSI-RS资源集中的每一个CSI-RS资源集的TCI状态,其中,所述目标TCI状态包括所述K个第一TCI状态,K为正整数;和/或,
若第一DCI用于触发K个CSI-RS资源集,所述第一DCI未调度PDSCH或PUSCH,且所述第一DCI的目标指示域指示X个第一TCI状态,则所述K个CSI-RS资源集与所述X个第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,确定所述K个CSI-RS资源集中的每一个CSI-RS资源组的TCI状态,其中,所述目标TCI状态包括所述X个第一TCI状态,其中,X表示所述K个CSI-RS资源集包括的CSI-RS资源组的总数,X为正整数;和/或,
若第一DCI用于触发K个CSI-RS资源集,所述第一DCI未调度PDSCH或PUSCH,且所述第一DCI的目标指示域指示H个第一TCI状态,则根据所述K个CSI-RS资源集与所述H个第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,确定所
述K个CSI-RS资源集中的每一个CSI-RS资源的TCI状态,其中,所述目标TCI状态包括所述H个第一TCI状态,其中,H表示所述K个CSI-RS资源集所包含的CSI-RS资源组中的CSI-RS资源的总数,H为正整数。
可选地,在所述目标信道包括PDCCH的情况下,第二确定模块502具体用于:
根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定所述PDCCH对应的预设CORESET或预设CORESET组或预设搜索空间集的目标TCI状态;
在所述预设CORESET或预设CORESET组或预设搜索空间集原有的TCI状态关联第二标识,且所述预设CORESET或预设CORESET组或预设搜索空间集的目标TCI状态关联第三标识,所述第二标识和所述第三标识用于标识目标资源的情况下,TCI状态确定装置500还包括:
第二关联模块,用于将所述预设CORESET或预设CORESET组或预设搜索空间集切换为与所述第三标识关联;或者,
第三切换模块,用于将所述预设CORESET或预设CORESET组或预设搜索空间集切换为通过所述第三标识关联的目标资源传输;或者,
第四切换模块,用于确定所述终端由所述第二标识关联的目标资源切换至所述第三标识关联的目标资源。
可选地,所述目标资源包括以下至少一项:
小区标识、物理小区标识、带宽部分BWP标识、发送接收点TRP标识、公共TCI状态池标识、公共TCI状态类型值、CORESET组标识、CORESET标识、信道组标识、CORESET池标识、搜索空间集标识、搜索空间ID、同步信号块SSB ID,SSB组ID。
可选地,在所述目标信道包括所述第一DCI调度的PDSCH或PUSCH的情况下,所述第一DCI的目标指示域指示用于所述PDSCH或PUSCH的第一TCI状态和/或,所述第一DCI的目标指示域指示所述PDSCH或PUSCH的至少两个标识信息与至少两个第一TCI状态之间的对应关系。
可选地,所述PDSCH或PUSCH的至少两个标识信息与至少两个第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,包括以下至少一项:
所述第一TCI状态与所述PDSCH或PUSCH的第四信息之间的对应关系,
所述第四信息包括:DMRS组、DMRS端口、频域资源和层中的至少一项;
所述第一TCI状态的排列顺序与第一排列顺序之间的对应关系,所述第一排列顺序包括以下至少一项:
所述PDSCH或PUSCH的DMRS组的排列顺序;
所述PDSCH或PUSCH的DMRS组的奇偶顺序;
所述PDSCH或PUSCH的DMRS端口的排列顺序;
所述PDSCH或PUSCH的DMRS端口的奇偶顺序;
所述PDSCH或PUSCH的频域资源的排列顺序;
所述PDSCH或PUSCH的频域资源的奇偶顺序;
所述PDSCH或PUSCH的层的排列顺序;
所述PDSCH或PUSCH的层的奇偶顺序。
可选地,在M等于1的情况下,第二确定模块502具体用于:
根据所述1个第一TCI状态更新所述目标信道和/或目标信号原有的TCI状态中的第一预设TCI状态,得到所述目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,所述第一预设TCI状态为所述目标信道和/或目标信号原有的TCI状态中的一个;或者,
确定所述目标信道和/或目标信号基于所述1个第一TCI状态进行单波束或单TRP传输;或者,
确定所述目标信道和/或目标信号共用所述1个第一TCI状态。
可选地,第二确定模块502,包括:
第三确定单元,用于确定所述终端需要传输的目标信道和/或目标信号包括与所述1个第一TCI状态关联的目标信道和/或目标信号;或者,
第四确定单元,用于确定所述终端需要传输的目标信道和/或目标信号包括与所述1个第一TCI状态对应的目标资源相关联的目标信道和/或目标信号;
其中,所述目标资源包括以下至少一项:
小区标识、物理小区标识、带宽部分BWP标识、发送接收点TRP标识、公共TCI状态池标识、公共TCI状态类型值、CORESET组标识、CORESET标识、信道组标识、CORESET池标识、搜索空间集标识、搜索空间ID、同步信号块SSB ID,SSB组ID。
可选地,所述M个第一TCI状态包括以下至少一项:M1个联合TCI状态、M2个独立下行链路DL TCI状态以及M3个独立上行链路UL TCI状态。
本申请实施例中的TCI状态确定装置500可以是电子设备,例如具有操作***的电子设备,也可以是电子设备中的部件,例如集成电路或芯片。该电子设备可以是网络侧设备,也可以为除网络侧设备之外的其他设备。示例性的,网络侧设备可以包括但不限于上述所列举的网络侧设备12的类型,其他设备可以为服务器、网络附属存储器(Network Attached Storage,NAS)等,本申请实施例不作具体限定。
本实施方式提供的TCI状态确定装置500能够实现如图3所示方法实施例中的各个过程,且能够取得相同的有益效果,为避免重复,在此不再赘述。
可选地,如图6所示,本申请实施例还提供一种通信设备600,包括处理器601和存储器602,存储器602上存储有可在所述处理器601上运行的程序或指令,例如,该通信设备600为终端时,该程序或指令被处理器601执行时实现如图2或图3所示TCI状态确定方法实施例的各个步骤,且能达到相同的技术效果。该通信设备600为终端时,该程序或指令被处理器601执行时实现如图2所示方法实施例的各个步骤;该通信设备600为网络侧设备时,该程序或指令被处理器601执行时实现如图3所示方法实施例的各个步骤,且能达到相同的技术效果,为避免重复,这里不再赘述。
本申请实施例还提供一种终端,包括处理器和通信接口,所述通信接口用于获取网络侧设备指示的公共波束信息,其中,所述公共波束信息包括M个第一TCI状态,M为正整数;所述处理器用于从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态;其中,所述目标信道,包括:物理上行控制信道PUCCH、物理下行控制信道PDCCH、物理下行共享信道PDSCH和物理上行共享信道PUSCH中的至少一项;或者,所述目标信号包括:探测参考信号SRS和信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS中的至少一项。
该终端实施例与上述终端侧方法实施例对应,上述方法实施例的各个实施过程和实现方式均可适用于该终端实施例中,且能达到相同的技术效果。具体地,图7为实现本申请实施例的一种终端的硬件结构示意图。
该终端700包括但不限于:射频单元701、网络模块702、音频输出单元
703、输入单元704、传感器705、显示单元706、用户输入单元707、接口单元708、存储器709以及处理器710等中的至少部分部件。
本领域技术人员可以理解,终端700还可以包括给各个部件供电的电源(比如电池),电源可以通过电源管理***与处理器710逻辑相连,从而通过电源管理***实现管理充电、放电、以及功耗管理等功能。图7中示出的终端结构并不构成对终端的限定,终端可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件,或者组合某些部件,或者不同的部件布置,在此不再赘述。
应理解的是,本申请实施例中,输入单元704可以包括图形处理单元(Graphics Processing Unit,GPU)7041和麦克风7042,图形处理器7041对在视频捕获模式或图像捕获模式中由图像捕获装置(如摄像头)获得的静态图片或视频的图像数据进行处理。显示单元706可包括显示面板7 061,可以采用液晶显示器、有机发光二极管等形式来配置显示面板7061。用户输入单元707包括触控面板7071以及其他输入设备7072中的至少一种。触控面板7071,也称为触摸屏。触控面板7071可包括触摸检测装置和触摸控制器两个部分。其他输入设备7072可以包括但不限于物理键盘、功能键(比如音量控制按键、开关按键等)、轨迹球、鼠标、操作杆,在此不再赘述。
本申请实施例中,射频单元701接收来自网络侧设备的下行数据后,可以传输给处理器710进行处理;另外,射频单元701可以向网络侧设备发送上行数据。通常,射频单元701包括但不限于天线、放大器、收发信机、耦合器、低噪声放大器、双工器等。
存储器709可用于存储软件程序或指令以及各种数据。存储器709可主要包括存储程序或指令的第一存储区和存储数据的第二存储区,其中,第一存储区可存储操作***、至少一个功能所需的应用程序或指令(比如声音播放功能、图像播放功能等)等。此外,存储器709可以包括易失性存储器或非易失性存储器,或者,存储器709可以包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中,非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(Read-Only Memory,ROM)、可编程只读存储器(Programmable ROM,PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(Erasable PROM,EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(Electrically EPROM,EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(Random Access
Memory,RAM),静态随机存取存储器(Static RAM,SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(Dynamic RAM,DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(Synchronous DRAM,SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(Double Data Rate SDRAM,DDRSDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(Enhanced SDRAM,ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(Synch link DRAM,SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(Direct Rambus RAM,DRRAM)。本申请实施例中的存储器709包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。
处理器710可包括一个或多个处理单元;可选的,处理器710集成应用处理器和调制解调处理器,其中,应用处理器主要处理涉及操作***、用户界面和应用程序等的操作,调制解调处理器主要处理无线通信信号,如基带处理器。可以理解的是,上述调制解调处理器也可以不集成到处理器710中。
其中,射频单元701,用于获取网络侧设备指示的公共波束信息,其中,所述公共波束信息包括M个第一TCI状态,M为正整数;
处理器710,用于从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态;
其中,所述目标信道,包括:物理上行控制信道PUCCH、物理下行控制信道PDCCH、物理下行共享信道PDSCH和物理上行共享信道PUSCH中的至少一项;所述目标信号包括:探测参考信号SRS和信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS中的至少一项。
可选地,处理器710执行的所述从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,包括:
根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,其中,所述目标信息包括以下至少一项:
所述第一TCI状态的数量;
所述第一TCI状态与第一标识信息之间的对应关系,所述第一标识信息用于标识所述目标信道和/或所述目标信号中的至少一个;
所述目标信道和/或目标信号所对应的第一标识信息的数量;
所述目标信道和/或目标信号对应的第一标识信息的值;
所述M个第一TCI状态的排列顺序或位置;
所述目标信道和/或目标信号所对应的第一标识信息的排列顺序;
所述目标信道和/或目标信号的类型;
所述目标信道和/或目标信号的传输模式;
所述目标信道和/或目标信号的时域行为;
第一信息或第二信息,所述第一信息表示第一下行控制信息DCI调度了PUSCH或PDSCH,所述第二信息表示第一DCI未调度PUSCH或PDSCH,所述第一DCI用于触发所述目标信号或者调度所述目标信道;
所述第一DCI的目标指示域,所述目标指示域用于指示所述M个第一TCI状态中的至少一个;
N个预设TCI状态,所述公共波束信息包括所述N个预设TCI状态,N为小于或者等于M的正整数;
所述N个预设TCI状态与所述第一标识信息之间的对应关系。
可选地,所述第一标识信息包括以下至少一项:
SRS资源集标识信息;
SRS资源标识信息;
信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS资源集标识信息;
CSI-RS资源组标识信息;
CSI-RS资源标识信息;
控制资源集CORESET组标识信息;
CORESET标识信息;
搜索空间集标识信息;
所述目标信道的解调参考信号DMRS组标识信息;
所述目标信道的DMRS端口标识信息;
所述目标信道的频域资源标识信息;
所述目标信道的层标识信息。
可选地,所述第一TCI状态与第一标识信息之间的对应关系包括以下至少一项:
所述M个第一TCI状态的排列位置与所述第一标识信息的排列位置之间的对应关系;
网络侧设备指示的所述第一TCI状态与所述第一标识信息之间的对应关系。
可选地,在所述目标信道和/或目标信号的传输模式为相干联合传输CJT模式的情况下,M为大于2的整数。
可选地,处理器710,还用于根据第三信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定所述N个预设TCI状态,其中,所述第三信息由网络侧设备指示或者由协议约定;
处理器710执行的所述根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,包括:
根据目标信息,从所述N个预设TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态。
可选地,在所述第一DCI用于调度PUSCH的情况下,所述目标指示域指示所述第一DCI调度的PUSCH的TCI状态,所述M个第一TCI状态包括所述第一DCI调度的PUSCH的TCI状态;
处理器710执行的所述根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,包括:
确定目标信号的目标TCI状态包括所述目标指示域所指示的TCI状态,所述目标信号包括以下至少一项:
所述终端需要发送的SRS资源集中的SRS,其中,所述终端需要发送的SRS资源集根据所述第一DCI触发的SRS资源集标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;
所述终端需要发送的SRS资源中的SRS,其中,所述终端需要发送的SRS资源根据所述第一DCI触发的SRS资源标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述第一DCI的目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;
所述第一DCI触发的全部SRS资源集或SRS资源中的SRS。
可选地,在所述第一DCI用于调度PUSCH的情况下,所述目标指示域指示所述第一DCI调度的PUSCH的TCI状态,所述M个第一TCI状态包括与第二TCI状态对应相同码点的TCI状态和所述第二TCI状态,所述第二TCI状态包括所述第一DCI调度的PUSCH的TCI状态;
处理器710执行的所述根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,包括:
确定目标信号的目标TCI状态包括与所述第二TCI状态对应相同码点的TCI状态或所述第二TCI状态,其中,所述目标目标信号包括以下至少一项:
所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源集中的CSI-RS,其中,所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源集根据所述第一DCI触发的CSI-RS资源集标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;
所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源组中的CSI-RS,其中,所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源组根据所述第一DCI触发的CSI-RS资源组标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述第一DCI的目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;
所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源中的CSI-RS,其中,所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源根据所述第一DCI触发的CSI-RS资源标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述第一DCI的目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;
所述第一DCI触发的全部CSI-RS资源集或或CSI-RS资源组或CSI-RS资源中的CSI-RS。
可选地,在所述第一DCI用于调度PDSCH的情况下,所述目标指示域指示所述第一DCI调度的PDSCH的TCI状态,所述M个第一TCI状态包括所述第一DCI调度的PDSCH的TCI状态;
处理器710执行的所述根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,包括:
确定目标信号的目标TCI状态包括所述目标指示域所指示的TCI状态,所述目标信号包括以下至少一项:
所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源集中的CSI-RS,其中,所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源集根据所述第一DCI触发的CSI-RS资源集标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;
所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源组中的CSI-RS,其中,所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源组根据所述第一DCI触发的CSI-RS资源组标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述第一DCI的目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;
所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源中的CSI-RS,其中,所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源根据所述第一DCI触发的CSI-RS资源标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述第一DCI的目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;
所述第一DCI触发的全部CSI-RS资源集或或CSI-RS资源组或CSI-RS资源中的CSI-RS。
可选地,在所述第一DCI用于调度PDSCH的情况下,所述目标指示域指示所述第一DCI调度的PDSCH的TCI状态,所述M个第一TCI状态包括与第三TCI状态对应相同码点的TCI状态和所述第三TCI状态,所述第三TCI状态包括所述第一DCI调度的PDSCH的TCI状态;
处理器710执行的所述根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,包括:
确定目标信号的目标TCI状态包括与所述第三TCI状态对应相同码点的TCI状态或所述第三TCI状态,所述目标信号包括以下至少一项:
所述终端需要发送的SRS资源集中的SRS,其中,所述终端需要发送的SRS资源集根据所述第一DCI触发的SRS资源集标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;
所述终端需要发送的SRS资源中的SRS,其中,所述终端需要发送的SRS资源根据所述第一DCI触发的SRS资源标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述第一DCI的目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;
所述第一DCI触发的全部SRS资源集或SRS资源中的SRS。
可选地,m为所述M个第一TCI状态或所述N个预设TCI状态包括的适用于所述目标信道和/或目标信号的第一TCI状态的数量,K为所述目标信道和/或目标信号所对应的第一标识信息的数量;
处理器710执行的所述根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定
目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,包括:
在m等于K的情况下,确定所述目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态包括所述m个第一TCI状态;和/或,
在m大于K的情况下,将所述m个第一TCI状态中的,且位于预设位置或来自所述网络侧设备的第一指示信息所指示的K个TCI状态,确定为目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态;和/或,
在m小于K的情况下,将所述m个第一TCI状态,确定为m个第一标识信息对应的目标信道和/或目标信号的TCI状态,所述m个第一标识信息为所述K个第一标识信息中的,且排列于预设位置或来自所述网络侧设备的第二指示信息所指示的m个第一标识信息;和/或,
确定所述目标TCI状态包括所述m个第一TCI状态和所述目标信道和/或目标信号原有的(K-m)个TCI状态。
可选地,在所述目标信号包括SRS,且所述SRS的周期行为是非周期性的情况下,处理器710执行的所述根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,包括:
若第一DCI用于触发K个SRS资源集,所述第一DCI未调度PDSCH或PUSCH,且所述第一DCI的目标指示域指示K个第一TCI状态,则根据所述K个SRS资源集与所述K个第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,确定所述K个SRS资源集中的每一个SRS资源集的TCI状态,其中,所述目标TCI状态包括所述K个第一TCI状态,K为正整数;和/或,
若第一DCI用于触发K个SRS资源集,所述第一DCI未调度PDSCH或PUSCH,且所述第一DCI的目标指示域指示X个第一TCI状态,则根据所述K个SRS资源集与所述X个第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,确定所述K个SRS资源集中的每一个SRS资源的TCI状态,其中,所述目标信道和/或目标信号包括所述K个SRS资源集,所述目标TCI状态包括所述X个第一TCI状态,其中,X表示所述K个SRS资源集包括的SRS资源的总数,X为正整数。
可选地,在所述目标信号包括CSI-RS,且所述CSI-RS的周期行为是非周期性的情况下,处理器710执行的所述根据目标信息,从所述M个第一
TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,包括:
若第一DCI用于触发K个CSI-RS资源集,所述第一DCI未调度PDSCH或PUSCH,且所述第一DCI的目标指示域指示K个第一TCI状态,则根据所述K个CSI-RS资源集与所述K个第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,确定所述K个CSI-RS资源集中的每一个CSI-RS资源集的TCI状态,其中,所述目标TCI状态包括所述K个第一TCI状态,K为正整数;和/或,
若第一DCI用于触发K个CSI-RS资源集,所述第一DCI未调度PDSCH或PUSCH,且所述第一DCI的目标指示域指示X个第一TCI状态,则根据所述K个CSI-RS资源集与所述X个第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,确定所述K个CSI-RS资源集中的每一个CSI-RS资源组的TCI状态,其中,所述目标TCI状态包括所述X个第一TCI状态,其中,X表示所述K个CSI-RS资源集包括的CSI-RS资源组的总数,X为正整数;和/或,
若第一DCI用于触发K个CSI-RS资源集,所述第一DCI未调度PDSCH或PUSCH,且所述第一DCI的目标指示域指示H个第一TCI状态,则根据所述K个CSI-RS资源集与所述H个第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,确定所述K个CSI-RS资源集中的每一个CSI-RS资源的TCI状态,其中,所述目标TCI状态包括所述H个第一TCI状态,其中,H表示所述K个CSI-RS资源集所包含的CSI-RS资源组中的CSI-RS资源的总数,H为正整数。
可选地,在所述目标信道包括PDCCH的情况下,处理器710执行的所述根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,包括:
根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定所述PDCCH对应的预设CORESET或预设CORESET组或预设搜索空间集的目标TCI状态;
在所述预设CORESET或预设CORESET组或预设搜索空间集原有的TCI状态关联第二标识,且所述预设CORESET或预设CORESET组或预设搜索空间集的目标TCI状态关联第三标识,所述第二标识和所述第三标识用于标识目标资源的情况下,处理器710还用于:
将所述预设CORESET或预设CORESET组或预设搜索空间集切换为与所述第三标识关联;或者,
将所述预设CORESET或预设CORESET组或预设搜索空间集切换为通过所述第三标识关联的目标资源传输;或者,
由所述第二标识关联的目标资源切换至所述第三标识关联的目标资源。
可选地,所述目标资源包括以下至少一项:
小区标识、物理小区标识、带宽部分BWP标识、发送接收点TRP标识、公共TCI状态池标识、公共TCI状态类型值、CORESET组标识、CORESET标识、信道组标识、CORESET池标识、搜索空间集标识、搜索空间ID、同步信号块SSB ID,SSB组ID。
可选地,在所述目标信道包括所述第一DCI调度的PDSCH或PUSCH的情况下,所述第一DCI的目标指示域指示用于所述PDSCH或PUSCH的第一TCI状态和/或,所述第一DCI的目标指示域指示所述PDSCH或PUSCH的至少两个标识信息与至少两个第一TCI状态之间的对应关系。
可选地,所述PDSCH或PUSCH的至少两个标识信息与至少两个第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,包括以下至少一项:
所述第一TCI状态与所述PDSCH或PUSCH的第四信息之间的对应关系,所述第四信息包括:DMRS组、DMRS端口、频域资源和层中的至少一项;
所述第一TCI状态的排列顺序与第一排列顺序之间的对应关系,所述第一排列顺序包括以下至少一项:
所述PDSCH或PUSCH的DMRS组的排列顺序;
所述PDSCH或PUSCH的DMRS组的奇偶顺序;
所述PDSCH或PUSCH的DMRS端口的排列顺序;
所述PDSCH或PUSCH的DMRS端口的奇偶顺序;
所述PDSCH或PUSCH的频域资源的排列顺序;
所述PDSCH或PUSCH的频域资源的奇偶顺序;
所述PDSCH或PUSCH的层的排列顺序;
所述PDSCH或PUSCH的层的奇偶顺序。
可选地,在M等于1的情况下,处理器710执行的所述从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,包括:
根据所述1个第一TCI状态更新所述目标信道和/或目标信号原有的TCI
状态中的第一预设TCI状态,得到所述目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,所述第一预设TCI状态为所述目标信道和/或目标信号原有的TCI状态中的一个;或者,
确定所述目标信道或目标信号基于所述1个第一TCI状态进行单波束或单TRP传输;或者,
确定所述目标信道和/或目标信号共用所述1个第一TCI状态。
可选地,处理器710执行的所述确定所述目标信道和/或目标信号基于所述1个第一TCI状态进行单波束或单TRP传输,包括:
确定需要传输的目标信道和/或目标信号包括与所述1个第一TCI状态关联的目标信道和/或目标信号;或者,
确定需要传输的目标信道和/或目标信号包括与所述1个第一TCI状态对应的目标资源相关联的目标信道和/或目标信号;
其中,所述目标资源包括以下至少一项:
小区标识、物理小区标识、带宽部分BWP标识、发送接收点TRP标识、公共TCI状态池标识、公共TCI状态类型值、CORESET组标识、CORESET标识、信道组标识、CORESET池标识、搜索空间集标识、搜索空间ID、同步信号块SSB ID,SSB组ID。
可选地,所述M个第一TCI状态包括以下至少一项:M1个联合TCI状态、M2个独立下行链路DL TCI状态以及M3个独立上行链路UL TCI状态。
上述终端700能够实现如图4所示TCI确定装置400中各个模型实现的过程,且能达到相同的技术效果,为避免重复,在此不再赘述。
本申请实施例还提供一种网络侧设备包括处理器和通信接口,所述通信接口用于向终端指示公共波束信息,其中,所述公共波束信息包括M个第一TCI状态,M为正整数;所述处理器用于从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态;其中,所述目标信道,包括:物理上行控制信道PUCCH、物理下行控制信道PDCCH、物理下行共享信道PDSCH和物理上行共享信道PUSCH中的至少一项;或者,所述目标信号包括:探测参考信号SRS和信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS中的至少一项。
该网络侧设备实施例与上述网络侧设备方法实施例对应,上述方法实施
例的各个实施过程和实现方式均可适用于该网络侧设备实施例中,且能达到相同的技术效果。
具体地,本申请实施例还提供了一种网络侧设备。如图8所示,该网络侧设备800包括:天线801、射频装置802、基带装置803、处理器804和存储器805。天线801与射频装置802连接。在上行方向上,射频装置802通过天线801接收信息,将接收的信息发送给基带装置803进行处理。在下行方向上,基带装置803对要发送的信息进行处理,并发送给射频装置802,射频装置802对收到的信息进行处理后经过天线801发送出去。
以上实施例中网络侧设备执行的方法可以在基带装置803中实现,该基带装置803包括基带处理器。
基带装置803例如可以包括至少一个基带板,该基带板上设置有多个芯片,如图8所示,其中一个芯片例如为基带处理器,通过总线接口与存储器805连接,以调用存储器805中的程序,执行以上方法实施例中所示的网络设备操作。
该网络侧设备还可以包括网络接口806,该接口例如为通用公共无线接口(common public radio interface,CPRI)。
具体地,本发明实施例的网络侧设备800还包括:存储在存储器805上并可在处理器804上运行的指令或程序,处理器804调用存储器805中的指令或程序执行图5所示各模块执行的方法,并达到相同的技术效果,为避免重复,故不在此赘述。
本申请实施例还提供一种可读存储介质,所述可读存储介质上存储有程序或指令,该程序或指令被处理器执行时实现如图2或图3所示TCI状态确定方法实施例的各个过程,且能达到相同的技术效果,为避免重复,这里不再赘述。
其中,所述处理器为上述实施例中所述的终端中的处理器。所述可读存储介质,包括计算机可读存储介质,如计算机只读存储器ROM、随机存取存储器RAM、磁碟或者光盘等。
本申请实施例另提供了一种芯片,所述芯片包括处理器和通信接口,所述通信接口和所述处理器耦合,所述处理器用于运行程序或指令,实现如图
2或图3所示TCI状态确定方法实施例的各个过程,且能达到相同的技术效果,为避免重复,这里不再赘述。
应理解,本申请实施例提到的芯片还可以称为***级芯片,***芯片,芯片***或片上***芯片等。
本申请实施例另提供了一种计算机程序/程序产品,所述计算机程序/程序产品被存储在存储介质中,所述计算机程序/程序产品被至少一个处理器执行以实现如图2或图3所示TCI状态确定方法实施例的各个过程,且能达到相同的技术效果,为避免重复,这里不再赘述。
本申请实施例还提供了一种无线通信***,包括:终端及网络侧设备,所述终端可用于执行如图2所示TCI状态确定方法的步骤,所述网络侧设备可用于执行如图3所示TCI状态确定方法的步骤。
需要说明的是,在本文中,术语“包括”、“包含”或者其任何其他变体意在涵盖非排他性的包含,从而使得包括一系列要素的过程、方法、物品或者装置不仅包括那些要素,而且还包括没有明确列出的其他要素,或者是还包括为这种过程、方法、物品或者装置所固有的要素。在没有更多限制的情况下,由语句“包括一个……”限定的要素,并不排除在包括该要素的过程、方法、物品或者装置中还存在另外的相同要素。此外,需要指出的是,本申请实施方式中的方法和装置的范围不限按示出或讨论的顺序来执行功能,还可包括根据所涉及的功能按基本同时的方式或按相反的顺序来执行功能,例如,可以按不同于所描述的次序来执行所描述的方法,并且还可以添加、省去、或组合各种步骤。另外,参照某些示例所描述的特征可在其他示例中被组合。
通过以上的实施方式的描述,本领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到上述实施例方法可借助软件加必需的通用硬件平台的方式来实现,当然也可以通过硬件,但很多情况下前者是更佳的实施方式。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分可以以计算机软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质(如ROM/RAM、磁碟、光盘)中,包括若干指令用以使得一台终端(可以是手机,计算机,服务器,空调器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述的方法。
上面结合附图对本申请的实施例进行了描述,但是本申请并不局限于上述的具体实施方式,上述的具体实施方式仅仅是示意性的,而不是限制性的,本领域的普通技术人员在本申请的启示下,在不脱离本申请宗旨和权利要求所保护的范围情况下,还可做出很多形式,均属于本申请的保护之内。
Claims (45)
- 一种传输配置指示TCI状态确定方法,包括:终端获取网络侧设备指示的公共波束信息,其中,所述公共波束信息包括M个第一TCI状态,M为正整数;所述终端从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态;其中,所述目标信道,包括:物理上行控制信道PUCCH、物理下行控制信道PDCCH、物理下行共享信道PDSCH和物理上行共享信道PUSCH中的至少一项;所述目标信号包括:探测参考信号SRS和信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS中的至少一项。
- 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其中,所述终端从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,包括:所述终端根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,其中,所述目标信息包括以下至少一项:所述第一TCI状态的数量;所述第一TCI状态与第一标识信息之间的对应关系,所述第一标识信息用于标识所述目标信道和/或所述目标信号中的至少一个;所述目标信道和/或目标信号所对应的第一标识信息的数量;所述目标信道和/或目标信号对应的第一标识信息的值;所述M个第一TCI状态的排列顺序或位置;所述目标信道和/或目标信号所对应的第一标识信息的排列顺序;所述目标信道和/或目标信号的类型;所述目标信道和/或目标信号的传输模式;所述目标信道和/或目标信号的时域行为;第一信息或第二信息,所述第一信息表示第一下行控制信息DCI调度了PUSCH或PDSCH,所述第二信息表示第一DCI未调度PUSCH或PDSCH,所述第一DCI用于触发所述目标信号或者调度所述目标信道;所述第一DCI的目标指示域,所述目标指示域用于指示所述M个第一 TCI状态中的至少一个;N个预设TCI状态,所述公共波束信息包括所述N个预设TCI状态,N为小于或者等于M的正整数;所述N个预设TCI状态与所述第一标识信息之间的对应关系。
- 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其中,所述第一标识信息包括以下至少一项:SRS资源集标识信息;SRS资源标识信息;信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS资源集标识信息;CSI-RS资源组标识信息;CSI-RS资源标识信息;控制资源集CORESET组标识信息;CORESET标识信息;搜索空间集标识信息;所述目标信道的解调参考信号DMRS组标识信息;所述目标信道的DMRS端口标识信息;所述目标信道的频域资源标识信息;所述目标信道的层标识信息。
- 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其中,所述第一TCI状态与第一标识信息之间的对应关系包括以下至少一项:所述M个第一TCI状态的排列位置与所述第一标识信息的排列位置之间的对应关系;网络侧设备指示的所述第一TCI状态与所述第一标识信息之间的对应关系。
- 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其中,在所述目标信道和/或目标信号的传输模式为相干联合传输CJT模式的情况下,M为大于2的整数。
- 根据权利要求2或5所述的方法,所述方法还包括:所述终端根据第三信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定所述N个预设TCI状态,其中,所述第三信息由网络侧设备指示或者由协议约定;所述终端根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,包括:所述终端根据目标信息,从所述N个预设TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态。
- 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其中,在所述第一DCI用于调度PUSCH的情况下,所述目标指示域指示所述第一DCI调度的PUSCH的TCI状态,所述M个第一TCI状态包括所述第一DCI调度的PUSCH的TCI状态;所述终端根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,包括:所述终端确定目标信号的目标TCI状态包括所述目标指示域所指示的TCI状态,所述目标信号包括以下至少一项:所述终端需要发送的SRS资源集中的SRS,其中,所述终端需要发送的SRS资源集根据所述第一DCI触发的SRS资源集标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;所述终端需要发送的SRS资源中的SRS,其中,所述终端需要发送的SRS资源根据所述第一DCI触发的SRS资源标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述第一DCI的目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;所述第一DCI触发的全部SRS资源集或SRS资源中的SRS。
- 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其中,在所述第一DCI用于调度PUSCH的情况下,所述目标指示域指示所述第一DCI调度的PUSCH的TCI状态,所述M个第一TCI状态包括与第二TCI状态对应相同码点的TCI状态和所述第二TCI状态,所述第二TCI状态包括所述第一DCI调度的PUSCH的TCI状态;所述终端根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,包括:所述终端确定目标信号的目标TCI状态包括与所述第二TCI状态对应相同码点的TCI状态或所述第二TCI状态,其中,所述目标目标信号包括以下至少一项:所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源集中的CSI-RS,其中,所述终端需要 发送的CSI-RS资源集根据所述第一DCI触发的CSI-RS资源集标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源组中的CSI-RS,其中,所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源组根据所述第一DCI触发的CSI-RS资源组标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述第一DCI的目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源中的CSI-RS,其中,所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源根据所述第一DCI触发的CSI-RS资源标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述第一DCI的目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;所述第一DCI触发的全部CSI-RS资源集或或CSI-RS资源组或CSI-RS资源中的CSI-RS。
- 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其中,在所述第一DCI用于调度PDSCH的情况下,所述目标指示域指示所述第一DCI调度的PDSCH的TCI状态,所述M个第一TCI状态包括所述第一DCI调度的PDSCH的TCI状态;所述终端根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,包括:所述终端确定目标信号的目标TCI状态包括所述目标指示域所指示的TCI状态,所述目标信号包括以下至少一项:所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源集中的CSI-RS,其中,所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源集根据所述第一DCI触发的CSI-RS资源集标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源组中的CSI-RS,其中,所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源组根据所述第一DCI触发的CSI-RS资源组标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述第一DCI的目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源中的CSI-RS,其中,所述终端需要发 送的CSI-RS资源根据所述第一DCI触发的CSI-RS资源标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述第一DCI的目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;所述第一DCI触发的全部CSI-RS资源集或或CSI-RS资源组或CSI-RS资源中的CSI-RS。
- 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其中,在所述第一DCI用于调度PDSCH的情况下,所述目标指示域指示所述第一DCI调度的PDSCH的TCI状态,所述M个第一TCI状态包括与第三TCI状态对应相同码点的TCI状态和所述第三TCI状态,所述第三TCI状态包括所述第一DCI调度的PDSCH的TCI状态;所述终端根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,包括:所述终端确定目标信号的目标TCI状态包括与所述第三TCI状态对应相同码点的TCI状态或所述第三TCI状态,所述目标信号包括以下至少一项:所述终端需要发送的SRS资源集中的SRS,其中,所述终端需要发送的SRS资源集根据所述第一DCI触发的SRS资源集标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;所述终端需要发送的SRS资源中的SRS,其中,所述终端需要发送的SRS资源根据所述第一DCI触发的SRS资源标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述第一DCI的目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;所述第一DCI触发的全部SRS资源集或SRS资源中的SRS。
- 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其中,m为所述M个第一TCI状态或所述N个预设TCI状态包括的适用于所述目标信道和/或目标信号的第一TCI状态的数量,K为所述目标信道和/或目标信号所对应的第一标识信息的数量;所述终端根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,包括:在m等于K的情况下,所述终端确定所述目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态包括所述m个第一TCI状态;和/或,在m大于K的情况下,所述终端将所述m个第一TCI状态中的,且位 于预设位置或来自所述网络侧设备的第一指示信息所指示的K个TCI状态,确定为目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态;和/或,在m小于K的情况下,所述终端将所述m个第一TCI状态,确定为m个第一标识信息对应的目标信道和/或目标信号的TCI状态,所述m个第一标识信息为所述K个第一标识信息中的,且排列于预设位置或来自所述网络侧设备的第二指示信息所指示的m个第一标识信息;和/或,所述终端确定所述目标TCI状态包括所述m个第一TCI状态和所述目标信道和/或目标信号原有的K-m个TCI状态。
- 根据权利要求2至11中任一项所述的方法,其中,在所述目标信号包括SRS,且所述SRS的周期行为是非周期性的情况下,所述终端根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,包括:若第一DCI用于触发K个SRS资源集,所述第一DCI未调度PDSCH或PUSCH,且所述第一DCI的目标指示域指示K个第一TCI状态,则所述终端根据所述K个SRS资源集与所述K个第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,确定所述K个SRS资源集中的每一个SRS资源集的TCI状态,其中,所述目标TCI状态包括所述K个第一TCI状态,K为正整数;和/或,若第一DCI用于触发K个SRS资源集,所述第一DCI未调度PDSCH或PUSCH,且所述第一DCI的目标指示域指示X个第一TCI状态,则所述终端根据所述K个SRS资源集与所述X个第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,确定所述K个SRS资源集中的每一个SRS资源的TCI状态,其中,所述目标信道和/或目标信号包括所述K个SRS资源集,所述目标TCI状态包括所述X个第一TCI状态,其中,X表示所述K个SRS资源集包括的SRS资源的总数,X为正整数。
- 根据权利要求2至9中任一项所述的方法,其中,在所述目标信号包括CSI-RS,且所述CSI-RS的周期行为是非周期性的情况下,所述终端根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,包括:若第一DCI用于触发K个CSI-RS资源集,所述第一DCI未调度PDSCH 或PUSCH,且所述第一DCI的目标指示域指示K个第一TCI状态,则所述终端根据所述K个CSI-RS资源集与所述K个第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,确定所述K个CSI-RS资源集中的每一个CSI-RS资源集的TCI状态,其中,所述目标TCI状态包括所述K个第一TCI状态,K为正整数;和/或,若第一DCI用于触发K个CSI-RS资源集,所述第一DCI未调度PDSCH或PUSCH,且所述第一DCI的目标指示域指示X个第一TCI状态,则所述终端根据所述K个CSI-RS资源集与所述X个第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,确定所述K个CSI-RS资源集中的每一个CSI-RS资源组的TCI状态,其中,所述目标TCI状态包括所述X个第一TCI状态,其中,X表示所述K个CSI-RS资源集包括的CSI-RS资源组的总数,X为正整数;和/或,若第一DCI用于触发K个CSI-RS资源集,所述第一DCI未调度PDSCH或PUSCH,且所述第一DCI的目标指示域指示H个第一TCI状态,则所述终端根据所述K个CSI-RS资源集与所述H个第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,确定所述K个CSI-RS资源集中的每一个CSI-RS资源的TCI状态,其中,所述目标TCI状态包括所述H个第一TCI状态,其中,H表示所述K个CSI-RS资源集所包含的CSI-RS资源组中的CSI-RS资源的总数,H为正整数。
- 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其中,在所述目标信道包括PDCCH的情况下,所述终端根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,包括:所述终端根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定所述PDCCH对应的预设CORESET或预设CORESET组或预设搜索空间集的目标TCI状态;在所述预设CORESET或预设CORESET组或预设搜索空间集原有的TCI状态关联第二标识,且所述预设CORESET或预设CORESET组或预设搜索空间集的目标TCI状态关联第三标识,所述第二标识和所述第三标识用于标识目标资源的情况下,所述方法还包括:所述终端将所述预设CORESET或预设CORESET组或预设搜索空间集切换为与所述第三标识关联;或者,所述终端将所述预设CORESET或预设CORESET组或预设搜索空间集 切换为通过所述第三标识关联的目标资源传输;或者,所述终端由所述第二标识关联的目标资源切换至所述第三标识关联的目标资源。
- 根据权利要求14所述的方法,其中,所述目标资源包括以下至少一项:小区标识、物理小区标识、带宽部分BWP标识、发送接收点TRP标识、公共TCI状态池标识、公共TCI状态类型值、CORESET组标识、CORESET标识、信道组标识、CORESET池标识、搜索空间集标识、搜索空间ID、同步信号块SSB ID,SSB组ID。
- 根据权利要求2或5所述的方法,其中,在所述目标信道包括所述第一DCI调度的PDSCH或PUSCH的情况下,所述第一DCI的目标指示域指示用于所述PDSCH或PUSCH的第一TCI状态和/或,所述第一DCI的目标指示域指示所述PDSCH或PUSCH的至少两个标识信息与至少两个第一TCI状态之间的对应关系。
- 根据权利要求16所述的方法,其中,所述PDSCH或PUSCH的至少两个标识信息与至少两个第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,包括以下至少一项:所述第一TCI状态与所述PDSCH或PUSCH的第四信息之间的对应关系,所述第四信息包括:DMRS组、DMRS端口、频域资源和层中的至少一项;所述第一TCI状态的排列顺序与第一排列顺序之间的对应关系,所述第一排列顺序包括以下至少一项:所述PDSCH或PUSCH的DMRS组的排列顺序;所述PDSCH或PUSCH的DMRS组的奇偶顺序;所述PDSCH或PUSCH的DMRS端口的排列顺序;所述PDSCH或PUSCH的DMRS端口的奇偶顺序;所述PDSCH或PUSCH的频域资源的排列顺序;所述PDSCH或PUSCH的频域资源的奇偶顺序;所述PDSCH或PUSCH的层的排列顺序;所述PDSCH或PUSCH的层的奇偶顺序。
- 根据权利要求1至9中任一项所述的方法,其中,在M等于1的情况 下,所述终端从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,包括:所述终端根据所述1个第一TCI状态更新所述目标信道和/或目标信号原有的TCI状态中的第一预设TCI状态,得到所述目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,所述第一预设TCI状态为所述目标信道和/或目标信号原有的TCI状态中的一个;或者,所述终端确定所述目标信道或目标信号基于所述1个第一TCI状态进行单波束或单TRP传输;或者,所述终端确定所述目标信道和/或目标信号共用所述1个第一TCI状态。
- 根据权利要求18所述的方法,其中,所述终端确定所述目标信道和/或目标信号基于所述1个第一TCI状态进行单波束或单TRP传输,包括:所述终端确定需要传输的目标信道和/或目标信号包括与所述1个第一TCI状态关联的目标信道和/或目标信号;或者,所述终端确定需要传输的目标信道和/或目标信号包括与所述1个第一TCI状态对应的目标资源相关联的目标信道和/或目标信号;其中,所述目标资源包括以下至少一项:小区标识、物理小区标识、带宽部分BWP标识、发送接收点TRP标识、公共TCI状态池标识、公共TCI状态类型值、CORESET组标识、CORESET标识、信道组标识、CORESET池标识、搜索空间集标识、搜索空间ID、同步信号块SSB ID,SSB组ID。
- 根据权利要求1至9中任一项所述的方法,其中,所述M个第一TCI状态包括以下至少一项:M1个联合TCI状态、M2个独立下行链路DL TCI状态以及M3个独立上行链路UL TCI状态。
- 一种传输配置指示TCI状态确定方法,包括:网络侧设备向终端指示公共波束信息,其中,所述公共波束信息包括M个第一TCI状态,M为正整数;所述网络侧设备从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态;其中,所述目标信道,包括:物理上行控制信道PUCCH、物理下行控制 信道PDCCH、物理下行共享信道PDSCH和物理上行共享信道PUSCH中的至少一项;或者,所述目标信号包括:探测参考信号SRS和信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS中的至少一项。
- 根据权利要求21所述的方法,其中,所述网络侧设备从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道或目标信号的目标TCI状态,包括:所述网络侧设备根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,其中,所述目标信息包括以下至少一项:所述第一TCI状态的数量;所述第一TCI状态与第一标识信息之间的对应关系,所述第一标识信息用于标识所述目标信道和/或所述目标信号中的至少一个;所述目标信道和/或目标信号所对应的第一标识信息的数量;所述目标信道和/或目标信号对应的第一标识信息的值;所述M个第一TCI状态的排列顺序或位置;所述目标信道和/或目标信号所对应的第一标识信息的排列顺序;所述目标信道和/或目标信号的类型;所述目标信道和/或目标信号的传输模式;所述目标信道和/或目标信号的时域行为;第一信息或第二信息,所述第一信息表示第一下行控制信息DCI调度了PUSCH或PDSCH,所述第二信息表示第一DCI未调度PUSCH或PDSCH,所述第一DCI用于触发所述目标信号或者调度所述目标信道;所述第一DCI的目标指示域,所述目标指示域用于指示所述M个第一TCI状态中的至少一个;N个预设TCI状态,所述公共波束信息包括所述N个预设TCI状态,N为小于或者等于M的正整数;所述N个预设TCI状态与所述第一标识信息之间的对应关系。
- 根据权利要求22所述的方法,其中,所述第一标识信息包括以下至少一项:SRS资源集标识信息;SRS资源标识信息;信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS资源集标识信息;CSI-RS资源组标识信息;CSI-RS资源标识信息;控制资源集CORESET组标识信息;CORESET标识信息;搜索空间集标识信息;所述目标信道的解调参考信号DMRS组标识信息;所述目标信道的DMRS端口标识信息;所述目标信道的频域资源标识信息;所述目标信道的层标识信息。
- 根据权利要求22所述的方法,其中,所述第一TCI状态与第一标识信息之间的对应关系包括以下至少一项:所述M个第一TCI状态的排列位置与所述第一标识信息的排列位置之间的对应关系;所述网络侧设备指示的所述第一TCI状态与所述第一标识信息之间的对应关系。
- 根据权利要求22所述的方法,其中,在所述目标信道和/或目标信号的传输模式为相干联合传输CJT模式的情况下,M为大于2的整数。
- 根据权利要求22或25所述的方法,所述方法还包括:所述网络侧设备根据第三信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定所述N个预设TCI状态,其中,所述第三信息由网络侧设备指示或者由协议约定;所述网络侧设备根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,包括:所述网络侧设备根据目标信息,从所述N个预设TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态。
- 根据权利要求22所述的方法,其中,在所述第一DCI用于调度PUSCH的情况下,所述目标指示域指示所述第一DCI调度的PUSCH的TCI状态,所述M个第一TCI状态包括所述第一DCI调度的PUSCH的TCI状态;所述网络侧设备根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信 道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,包括:所述网络侧设备确定目标信号的目标TCI状态包括所述目标指示域所指示的TCI状态,所述目标信号包括以下至少一项:所述终端需要发送的SRS资源集中的SRS,其中,所述终端需要发送的SRS资源集根据所述第一DCI触发的SRS资源集标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;所述终端需要发送的SRS资源中的SRS,其中,所述终端需要发送的SRS资源根据所述第一DCI触发的SRS资源标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述第一DCI的目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;所述第一DCI触发的全部SRS资源集或SRS资源中的SRS。
- 根据权利要求22所述的方法,其中,在所述第一DCI用于调度PUSCH的情况下,所述目标指示域指示所述第一DCI调度的PUSCH的TCI状态,所述M个第一TCI状态包括与第二TCI状态对应相同码点的TCI状态和所述第二TCI状态,所述第二TCI状态包括所述第一DCI调度的PUSCH的TCI状态;所述网络侧设备根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,包括:所述网络侧设备确定目标信号的目标TCI状态包括与所述第二TCI状态对应相同码点的TCI状态或所述第二TCI状态,所述目标信号包括以下至少一项:所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源集中的CSI-RS,其中,所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源集根据所述第一DCI触发的CSI-RS资源集标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源组中的CSI-RS,其中,所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源组根据所述第一DCI触发的CSI-RS资源组标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述第一DCI的目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源中的CSI-RS,其中,所述终端需要发 送的CSI-RS资源根据所述第一DCI触发的CSI-RS资源标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述第一DCI的目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;所述第一DCI触发的全部CSI-RS资源集或或CSI-RS资源组或CSI-RS资源中的CSI-RS。
- 根据权利要求22所述的方法,其中,在所述第一DCI用于调度PDSCH的情况下,所述目标指示域指示所述第一DCI调度的PDSCH的TCI状态,所述M个第一TCI状态包括所述第一DCI调度的PDSCH的TCI状态;所述网络侧设备根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,包括:所述网络侧设备确定目标信号的目标TCI状态包括所述目标指示域所指示的TCI状态,所述目标信号包括以下至少一项:所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源集中的CSI-RS,其中,所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源集根据所述第一DCI触发的CSI-RS资源集标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源组中的CSI-RS,其中,所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源组根据所述第一DCI触发的CSI-RS资源组标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述第一DCI的目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源中的CSI-RS,其中,所述终端需要发送的CSI-RS资源根据所述第一DCI触发的CSI-RS资源标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述第一DCI的目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;所述第一DCI触发的全部CSI-RS资源集或或CSI-RS资源组或CSI-RS资源中的CSI-RS。
- 根据权利要求22所述的方法,其中,在所述第一DCI用于调度PDSCH的情况下,所述目标指示域指示所述第一DCI调度的PDSCH的TCI状态,所述M个第一TCI状态包括与第三TCI状态对应相同码点的TCI状态和所 述第三TCI状态,所述第三TCI状态包括所述第一DCI调度的PDSCH的TCI状态;所述网络侧设备根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,包括:所述网络侧设备确定目标信号的目标TCI状态包括与所述第三TCI状态对应相同码点的TCI状态或所述第三TCI状态,所述目标信号包括以下至少一项:所述终端需要发送的SRS资源集中的SRS,其中,所述终端需要发送的SRS资源集根据所述第一DCI触发的SRS资源集标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;所述终端需要发送的SRS资源中的SRS,其中,所述终端需要发送的SRS资源根据所述第一DCI触发的SRS资源标识信息与所述第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,以及所述第一DCI的目标指示域所指示的TCI状态确定;所述第一DCI触发的全部SRS资源集或SRS资源中的SRS。
- 根据权利要求22所述的方法,其中,m为所述M个第一TCI状态或所述N个预设TCI状态包括的适用于所述目标信道和/或目标信号的第一TCI状态的数量,K为所述目标信道和/或目标信号所对应的第一标识信息的数量;所述网络侧设备根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,包括:在m等于K的情况下,所述网络侧设备确定所述目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态包括所述m个第一TCI状态;和/或,在m大于K的情况下,所述网络侧设备将所述m个第一TCI状态中的,且位于预设位置或所述网络侧设备向所述终端发送的第一指示信息所指示的K个TCI状态,确定为目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态;和/或,在m小于K的情况下,所述网络侧设备将所述m个第一TCI状态,确定为m个第一标识信息对应的目标信道和/或目标信号的TCI状态,所述m个第一标识信息为所述K个第一标识信息中的,且排列于预设位置或所述网络侧设备向所述终端发送的第二指示信息所指示的m个第一标识信息;和/ 或,所述网络侧设备确定所述目标TCI状态包括所述m个第一TCI状态和所述目标信道和/或目标信号原有的K-m个TCI状态。
- 根据权利要求22至31中任一项所述的方法,其中,在所述目标信号包括SRS,且所述SRS的周期行为是非周期性的情况下,所述网络侧设备根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,包括:若第一DCI用于触发K个SRS资源集,所述第一DCI未调度PDSCH或PUSCH,且所述第一DCI的目标指示域指示K个第一TCI状态,则所述网络侧设备根据所述K个SRS资源集与所述K个第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,确定所述K个SRS资源集中的每一个SRS资源集的TCI状态,其中,所述目标TCI状态包括所述K个第一TCI状态,K为正整数;和/或,若第一DCI用于触发K个SRS资源集,所述第一DCI未调度PDSCH或PUSCH,且所述第一DCI的目标指示域指示X个第一TCI状态,则所述网络侧设备根据所述K个SRS资源集与所述X个第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,确定所述K个SRS资源集中的每一个SRS资源的TCI状态,其中,所述目标信道和/或目标信号包括所述K个SRS资源集,所述目标TCI状态包括所述X个第一TCI状态,其中,X表示所述K个SRS资源集包括的SRS资源的总数,X为正整数。
- 根据权利要求22至31中任一项所述的方法,其中,在所述目标信号包括CSI-RS,且所述CSI-RS的周期行为是非周期性的情况下,所述网络侧设备根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,包括:若第一DCI用于触发K个CSI-RS资源集,所述第一DCI未调度PDSCH或PUSCH,且所述第一DCI的目标指示域指示K个第一TCI状态,则所述网络侧设备根据所述K个CSI-RS资源集与所述K个第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,确定所述K个CSI-RS资源集中的每一个CSI-RS资源集的TCI状态,其中,所述目标TCI状态包括所述K个第一TCI状态,K为正整数;和/或,若第一DCI用于触发K个CSI-RS资源集,所述第一DCI未调度PDSCH 或PUSCH,且所述第一DCI的目标指示域指示X个第一TCI状态,则所述网络侧设备根据所述K个CSI-RS资源集与所述X个第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,确定所述K个CSI-RS资源集中的每一个CSI-RS资源组的TCI状态,其中,所述目标TCI状态包括所述X个第一TCI状态,其中,X表示所述K个CSI-RS资源集包括的CSI-RS资源组的总数,X为正整数;和/或,若第一DCI用于触发K个CSI-RS资源集,所述第一DCI未调度PDSCH或PUSCH,且所述第一DCI的目标指示域指示H个第一TCI状态,则所述网络侧设备根据所述K个CSI-RS资源集与所述H个第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,确定所述K个CSI-RS资源集中的每一个CSI-RS资源的TCI状态,其中,所述目标TCI状态包括所述H个第一TCI状态,其中,H表示所述K个CSI-RS资源集所包含的CSI-RS资源组中的CSI-RS资源的总数,H为正整数。
- 根据权利要求22所述的方法,其中,在所述目标信道包括PDCCH的情况下,所述网络侧设备根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,包括:所述网络侧设备根据目标信息,从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定所述PDCCH对应的预设CORESET或预设CORESET组或预设搜索空间集的目标TCI状态;在所述预设CORESET或预设CORESET组或预设搜索空间集原有的TCI状态关联第二标识,且所述预设CORESET或预设CORESET组或预设搜索空间集的目标TCI状态关联第三标识,所述第二标识和所述第三标识用于标识目标资源的情况下,所述方法还包括:所述网络侧设备将所述预设CORESET或预设CORESET组或预设搜索空间集切换为与所述第三标识关联;或者,所述网络侧设备将所述预设CORESET或预设CORESET组或预设搜索空间集切换为通过所述第三标识关联的目标资源传输;或者,所述网络侧设备确定所述终端由所述第二标识关联的目标资源切换至所述第三标识关联的目标资源。
- 根据权利要求34所述的方法,其中,所述目标资源包括以下至少一 项:小区标识、物理小区标识、带宽部分BWP标识、发送接收点TRP标识、公共TCI状态池标识、公共TCI状态类型值、CORESET组标识、CORESET标识、信道组标识、CORESET池标识、搜索空间集标识、搜索空间ID、同步信号块SSB ID,SSB组ID。
- 根据权利要求22或25所述的方法,其中,在所述目标信道包括所述第一DCI调度的PDSCH或PUSCH的情况下,所述第一DCI的目标指示域指示用于所述PDSCH或PUSCH的第一TCI状态和/或,所述第一DCI的目标指示域指示所述PDSCH或PUSCH的至少两个标识信息与至少两个第一TCI状态之间的对应关系。
- 根据权利要求36所述的方法,其中,所述PDSCH或PUSCH的至少两个标识信息与至少两个第一TCI状态之间的对应关系,包括以下至少一项:所述第一TCI状态与所述PDSCH或PUSCH的第四信息之间的对应关系,所述第四信息包括:DMRS组、DMRS端口、频域资源和层中的至少一项;所述第一TCI状态的排列顺序与第一排列顺序之间的对应关系,所述第一排列顺序包括以下至少一项:所述PDSCH或PUSCH的DMRS组的排列顺序;所述PDSCH或PUSCH的DMRS组的奇偶顺序;所述PDSCH或PUSCH的DMRS端口的排列顺序;所述PDSCH或PUSCH的DMRS端口的奇偶顺序;所述PDSCH或PUSCH的频域资源的排列顺序;所述PDSCH或PUSCH的频域资源的奇偶顺序;所述PDSCH或PUSCH的层的排列顺序;所述PDSCH或PUSCH的层的奇偶顺序。
- 根据权利要求21至29中任一项所述的方法,其中,在M等于1的情况下,所述网络侧设备从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态,包括:所述网络侧设备根据所述1个第一TCI状态更新所述目标信道和/或目标信号原有的TCI状态中的第一预设TCI状态,得到所述目标信道和/或目标信 号的目标TCI状态,所述第一预设TCI状态为所述目标信道和/或目标信号原有的TCI状态中的一个;或者,所述网络侧设备确定所述目标信道和/或目标信号基于所述1个第一TCI状态进行单波束或单TRP传输;或者,所述网络侧设备确定所述目标信道和/或目标信号共用所述1个第一TCI状态。
- 根据权利要求38所述的方法,其中,所述网络侧设备确定所述目标信道和/或目标信号基于所述1个第一TCI状态进行单波束或单TRP传输,包括:所述网络侧设备确定所述终端需要传输的目标信道和/或目标信号包括与所述1个第一TCI状态关联的目标信道和/或目标信号;或者,所述网络侧设备确定所述终端需要传输的目标信道和/或目标信号包括与所述1个第一TCI状态对应的目标资源相关联的目标信道和/或目标信号;其中,所述目标资源包括以下至少一项:小区标识、物理小区标识、带宽部分BWP标识、发送接收点TRP标识、公共TCI状态池标识、公共TCI状态类型值、CORESET组标识、CORESET标识、信道组标识、CORESET池标识、搜索空间集标识、搜索空间ID、同步信号块SSB ID,SSB组ID。
- 根据权利要求21至29中任一项所述的方法,其中,所述M个第一TCI状态包括以下至少一项:M1个联合TCI状态、M2个独立下行链路DL TCI状态以及M3个独立上行链路UL TCI状态。
- 一种TCI状态确定装置,应用于终端,所述装置包括:;获取模块,用于获取网络侧设备指示的公共波束信息,其中,所述公共波束信息包括M个第一TCI状态,M为正整数;第一确定模块,用于从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态;其中,所述目标信道,包括:物理上行控制信道PUCCH、物理下行控制信道PDCCH、物理下行共享信道PDSCH和物理上行共享信道PUSCH中的至少一项;或者,所述目标信号包括:探测参考信号SRS和信道状态信息参 考信号CSI-RS中的至少一项。
- 一种TCI状态确定装置,应用于网络侧设备,所述装置包括:第一发送模块,用于向终端指示公共波束信息,其中,所述公共波束信息包括M个第一TCI状态,M为正整数;第二确定模块,用于从所述M个第一TCI状态中确定目标信道和/或目标信号的目标TCI状态;其中,所述目标信道,包括:物理上行控制信道PUCCH、物理下行控制信道PDCCH、物理下行共享信道PDSCH和物理上行共享信道PUSCH中的至少一项;或者,所述目标信号包括:探测参考信号SRS和信道状态信息参考信号CSI-RS中的至少一项。
- 一种终端,包括处理器和存储器,所述存储器存储可在所述处理器上运行的程序或指令,所述程序或指令被所述处理器执行时实现如权利要求1至20中任一项所述的TCI状态确定方法的步骤。
- 一种网络侧设备,包括处理器和存储器,所述存储器存储可在所述处理器上运行的程序或指令,所述程序或指令被所述处理器执行时实现如权利要求21至40中任一项所述的TCI状态确定方法的步骤。
- 一种可读存储介质,所述可读存储介质上存储程序或指令,所述程序或指令被处理器执行时实现如权利要求1至20中任一项所述的TCI状态确定方法,或者实现如权利要求21至40中任一项所述的TCI状态确定方法的步骤。
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
CN202210845953.2 | 2022-07-18 | ||
CN202210845953.2A CN117479321A (zh) | 2022-07-18 | 2022-07-18 | Tci状态确定方法、装置、终端和网络侧设备 |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2024017193A1 true WO2024017193A1 (zh) | 2024-01-25 |
Family
ID=89617162
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/CN2023/107708 WO2024017193A1 (zh) | 2022-07-18 | 2023-07-17 | Tci状态确定方法、装置、终端和网络侧设备 |
Country Status (2)
Country | Link |
---|---|
CN (1) | CN117479321A (zh) |
WO (1) | WO2024017193A1 (zh) |
Citations (4)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20210360602A1 (en) * | 2020-05-15 | 2021-11-18 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Applying a common beam for multiple signals to a default physical downlink shared channel (pdsch) beam |
WO2022070344A1 (ja) * | 2020-09-30 | 2022-04-07 | 株式会社Nttドコモ | 端末、無線通信方法及び基地局 |
CN114337755A (zh) * | 2020-09-30 | 2022-04-12 | 维沃移动通信有限公司 | 波束信息指示、获取方法、装置、终端及网络侧设备 |
US20220217751A1 (en) * | 2021-01-04 | 2022-07-07 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Tci state application time configuration |
-
2022
- 2022-07-18 CN CN202210845953.2A patent/CN117479321A/zh active Pending
-
2023
- 2023-07-17 WO PCT/CN2023/107708 patent/WO2024017193A1/zh unknown
Patent Citations (4)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20210360602A1 (en) * | 2020-05-15 | 2021-11-18 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Applying a common beam for multiple signals to a default physical downlink shared channel (pdsch) beam |
WO2022070344A1 (ja) * | 2020-09-30 | 2022-04-07 | 株式会社Nttドコモ | 端末、無線通信方法及び基地局 |
CN114337755A (zh) * | 2020-09-30 | 2022-04-12 | 维沃移动通信有限公司 | 波束信息指示、获取方法、装置、终端及网络侧设备 |
US20220217751A1 (en) * | 2021-01-04 | 2022-07-07 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Tci state application time configuration |
Non-Patent Citations (1)
Title |
---|
MEDIATEK INC.: "Discussion on remaining issues of TCI state switch", 3GPP TSG_RAN WG4 MEETING #94-E-BIS, R4-2003494, 10 April 2020 (2020-04-10), XP051872090 * |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
CN117479321A (zh) | 2024-01-30 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US20230239032A1 (en) | Beam processing method and apparatus, and related device | |
US20230362927A1 (en) | Pusch transmission method and apparatus, device, and storage medium | |
US20230239870A1 (en) | Method and apparatus for determining and configuring uplink channel parameter | |
US20230239896A1 (en) | Transmission mode determining method and apparatus, and communications device | |
US20240235761A1 (en) | Transmission processing method and apparatus, terminal, network-side device, and storage medium | |
US20240023108A1 (en) | Method and apparatus for determining pucch resource, and terminal | |
CN114337757A (zh) | 波束信息指示、获取方法、装置、终端及网络侧设备 | |
US20240080148A1 (en) | Csi measurement resource processing method and apparatus, terminal, and readable storage medium | |
US20240147565A1 (en) | Tci state indication method and apparatus, terminal, and network side device | |
US20230247467A1 (en) | Method and apparatus for determining channel state information, method and apparatus for determining reporting setting, and related device | |
WO2023284801A1 (zh) | Tci状态确定方法、装置、终端及网络侧设备 | |
WO2024017193A1 (zh) | Tci状态确定方法、装置、终端和网络侧设备 | |
WO2023151655A1 (zh) | 上行tci状态确定方法、装置、终端和网络侧设备 | |
WO2023151656A1 (zh) | 下行tci状态确定方法、装置、终端和网络侧设备 | |
WO2023179753A1 (zh) | 波束信息指示方法、装置、终端及网络侧设备 | |
WO2023207842A1 (zh) | 波束信息确定方法、终端及网络侧设备 | |
WO2023179652A1 (zh) | 波束失败检测方法、装置、终端和存储介质 | |
WO2024022248A1 (zh) | 信息指示方法、用户设备及网络侧设备 | |
WO2023169363A1 (zh) | 上行对象发送方法、装置、通信设备、***及存储介质 | |
WO2024022247A1 (zh) | 定时提前ta的维护方法、装置、设备及介质 | |
WO2023198044A1 (zh) | 信息接收方法、信息发送方法、装置及设备 | |
CN114501485B (zh) | 信息上报方法及终端 | |
CN115913475B (zh) | 波束信息确定方法、装置、通信设备及存储介质 | |
WO2024099132A1 (zh) | 信息确定方法、装置及通信设备 | |
WO2023151649A1 (zh) | 信息激活方法、终端及网络侧设备 |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 23842256 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |